Teach Yourself VISUALLY Macs

01_384688-ffirs.qxp 9/5/08 6:12 PM Page i Macs by Paul McFedries 01_384688-ffirs.qxp 9/5/08 6:12 PM Page ii Te...

Author: Paul McFedries

84 downloads 1468 Views 128MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!

Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

01_384688-ffirs.qxp

9/5/08

6:12 PM

Page i

Macs by Paul McFedries

01_384688-ffirs.qxp

9/5/08

6:12 PM

Page ii

Teach Yourself VISUALLY™ Macs Published by Wiley Publishing, Inc. 10475 Crosspoint Boulevard Indianapolis, IN 46256 www.wiley.com Published simultaneously in Canada Copyright © 2009 by Wiley Publishing, Inc., Indianapolis, Indiana No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, scanning or otherwise, except as permitted under Sections 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act, without either the prior written permission of the Publisher, or authorization through payment of the appropriate per-copy fee to the Copyright Clearance Center, 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, (978) 750-8400, fax (978) 646-8600. Requests to the Publisher for permission should be addressed to the Legal Department, Wiley Publishing, Inc., 10475 Crosspoint Blvd., Indianapolis, IN 46256, (317) 572-3447, fax (317) 572-4355, Online: www.wiley.com/go/permissions. Library of Congress Control Number: 2008935264 ISBN: 978-0-470-38468-8 Manufactured in the United States of America 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Trademark Acknowledgments Wiley, the Wiley Publishing logo, Visual, the Visual logo, Simplified, Master VISUALLY, Teach Yourself VISUALLY, Visual Blueprint, Read Less - Learn More and related trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of John Wiley & Sons, Inc. and/or its affiliates. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Wiley Publishing, Inc. is not associated with any product or vendor mentioned in this book.

LIMIT OF LIABILITY/DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY: THE PUBLISHER AND THE AUTHOR MAKE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE ACCURACY OR COMPLETENESS OF THE CONTENTS OF THIS WORK AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NO WARRANTY MAY BE CREATED OR EXTENDED BY SALES OR PROMOTIONAL MATERIALS. THE ADVICE AND STRATEGIES CONTAINED HEREIN MAY NOT BE SUITABLE FOR EVERY SITUATION. THIS WORK IS SOLD WITH THE UNDERSTANDING THAT THE PUBLISHER IS NOT ENGAGED IN RENDERING LEGAL, ACCOUNTING, OR OTHER PROFESSIONAL SERVICES. IF PROFESSIONAL ASSISTANCE IS REQUIRED, THE SERVICES OF A COMPETENT PROFESSIONAL PERSON SHOULD BE SOUGHT. NEITHER THE PUBLISHER NOR THE AUTHOR SHALL BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES ARISING HEREFROM. THE FACT THAT AN ORGANIZATION OR WEBSITE IS REFERRED TO IN THIS WORK AS A CITATION AND/OR A POTENTIAL SOURCE OF FURTHER INFORMATION DOES NOT MEAN THAT THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER ENDORSES THE INFORMATION THE ORGANIZATION OR WEBSITE MAY PROVIDE OR RECOMMENDATIONS IT MAY MAKE. FURTHER, READERS SHOULD BE AWARE THAT INTERNET WEBSITES LISTED IN THIS WORK MAY HAVE CHANGED OR DISAPPEARED BETWEEN WHEN THIS WORK WAS WRITTEN AND WHEN IT IS READ.

FOR PURPOSES OF ILLUSTRATING THE CONCEPTS AND TECHNIQUES DESCRIBED IN THIS BOOK, THE AUTHOR HAS CREATED VARIOUS NAMES, COMPANY NAMES, MAILING, E-MAIL AND INTERNET ADDRESSES, PHONE AND FAX NUMBERS AND SIMILAR INFORMATION, ALL OF WHICH ARE FICTITIOUS. ANY RESEMBLANCE OF THESE FICTITIOUS NAMES, ADDRESSES, PHONE AND FAX NUMBERS AND SIMILAR INFORMATION TO ANY ACTUAL PERSON, COMPANY AND/OR ORGANIZATION IS UNINTENTIONAL AND PURELY COINCIDENTAL.

Contact Us For general information on our other products and services please contact our Customer Care Department within the U.S. at 800-762-2974, outside the U.S. at 317-572-3993 or fax 317-572-4002. For technical support please visit www.wiley.com/techsupport.

US Sales Contact Wiley at (800) 762-2974 or fax (317) 572-4002.

01_384688-ffirs.qxp

9/5/08

6:12 PM

Page iii

Praise for Visual Books “Like a lot of other people, I understand things best when I see them visually. Your books really make learning easy and life more fun.” John T. Frey (Cadillac, MI)

“I have quite a few of your Visual books and have been very pleased with all of them. I love the way the lessons are presented!” Mary Jane Newman (Yorba Linda, CA)

“I bought my first Teach Yourself VISUALLY book last month. Wow. Now I want to learn everything in this easy format!” Tom Vial (New York, NY)

“Thank you, thank you, thank you...for making it so easy for me to break into this high-tech world. I now own four of your books. I recommend them to anyone who is a beginner like myself.” Gay O’Donnell (Calgary, Alberta, Canada)

“I just purchased my third Visual book (my first two are dog-eared now!), and, once again, your product has surpassed my expectations. Tracey Moore (Memphis, TN)

“I am an avid fan of your Visual books. If I need to learn anything, I just buy one of your books and learn the topic in no time. Wonders! I have even trained my friends to give me Visual books as gifts.” Illona Bergstrom (Aventura, FL)

“Thank you for making it so clear. I appreciate it. I will buy many more Visual books.” J.P. Sangdong (North York, Ontario, Canada)

“I have several books from the Visual series and have always found them to be valuable resources.” Stephen P. Miller (Ballston Spa, NY)

“Thank you for the wonderful books you produce. It wasn’t until I was an adult that I discovered how I learn — visually. Nothing compares to Visual books. I love the simple layout. I can just grab a book and use it at my computer, lesson by lesson. And I understand the material! You really know the way I think and learn. Thanks so much!” Stacey Han (Avondale, AZ)

“I absolutely admire your company’s work. Your books are terrific. The format is perfect, especially for visual learners like me. Keep them coming!” Frederick A. Taylor, Jr. (New Port Richey, FL)

“I have several of your Visual books and they are the best I have ever used.” Stanley Clark (Crawfordville, FL)

“I write to extend my thanks and appreciation for your books. They are clear, easy to follow, and straight to the point. Keep up the good work! I bought several of your books and they are just right! No regrets! I will always buy your books because they are the best.” Seward Kollie (Dakar, Senegal)

“Compliments to the chef!! Your books are extraordinary! Or, simply put, extra-ordinary, meaning way above the rest! THANK YOU THANK YOU THANK YOU! I buy them for friends, family, and colleagues.” Christine J. Manfrin (Castle Rock, CO)

“What fantastic teaching books you have produced! Congratulations to you and your staff. You deserve the Nobel Prize in Education in the Software category. Thanks for helping me understand computers.” Bruno Tonon (Melbourne, Australia)

“Over time, I have bought a number of your ‘Read Less Learn More’ books. For me, they are THE way to learn anything easily. I learn easiest using your method of teaching.” José A. Mazón (Cuba, NY)

“I am an avid purchaser and reader of the Visual series, and they are the greatest computer books I’ve seen. The Visual books are perfect for people like myself who enjoy the computer, but want to know how to use it more efficiently. Your books have definitely given me a greater understanding of my computer, and have taught me to use it more effectively. Thank you very much for the hard work, effort, and dedication that you put into this series.” Alex Diaz (Las Vegas, NV) July 05

01_384688-ffirs.qxp

9/5/08

6:12 PM

Page iv

Credits Project Editor Sarah Cisco

Book Design Kathie Rickard

Sr. Acquisitions Editor Jody Lefevere

Production Coordinator Erin Smith

Copy Editor Scott Tullis

Layout Elizabeth Brooks Carrie A. Cesavice Andrea Hornberger

Technical Editor Dennis Cohen Editorial Manager Robyn Siesky

Screen Artist Jill A. Proll

Editorial Assistant Laura Sinise

Illustrators Ronda David-Burroughs Cheryl Grubbs

Business Manager Amy Knies

Proofreader Melissa D. Buddendeck

Sr. Marketing Manager Sandy Smith

Quality Control John Greenough

Manufacturing Allan Conley Linda Cook Paul Gilchrist Jennifer Guynn

Indexer Broccoli Information Mgt. Vice President and Executive Group Publisher Richard Swadley Vice President and Publisher Barry Pruett Composition Director Debbie Stailey

01_384688-ffirs.qxp

9/5/08

6:12 PM

Page v

About the Author Paul McFedries is a freelance technical writer and passionate Mac fan who has been using Apple computers since 1989. He has written over 50 books that have sold more than three million copies worldwide. These books include the Wiley titles Macs Portable Genius, MacBook Air Portable Genius, and Teach Yourself VISUALLY Computers, Fifth Edition. Please visit Paul’s personal website at www.mcfedries.com. Paul is also the proprietor of Word Spy (www.wordspy.com) a website that tracks new words and phrases as they enter the language.

Author’s Acknowledgments All books have text, of course, and I had fun supplying this book with its textual skeleton. However, this book’s beauty (and it is beautiful, I’m sure you will agree) comes from Wiley’s immensely talented group of illustrators, designers, and layout artists. They are all listed in the Credits section on the previous page, and I thank them for creating another gem. The text is important too, and the task of ensuring that what you read here is accurate, logically presented, and free of errors fell to an excellent group of editors that included project editor Sarah Cisco, copy editor Scott Tullis, and technical editor Dennis Cohen. Thanks to all of you for your exceptional competence and hard work. Thanks, as well, to acquistitions editor Jody Lefevere for asking me to write this book.

02_384688-ftoc.qxp

9/5/08

6:13 PM

Page vi

Table of Contents

1

chapter

Learning about Mac Types

Understanding Mac Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Learn About the iMac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Delve Into the Mac Mini . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Get to Know the Mac Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Check Out the MacBook Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

101 c a iM

r’s ne n i e eg id A B Gu

Tour the MacBook Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Take a Look at the MacBook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2

chapter

Understanding What You Can Do with Your Mac

Create Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Play and Record Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 View and Organize Your Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Play and Make a Movie or DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Take Advantage of the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Communicate with Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Organize Your Contacts and Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

My Sp a Repo ce rt by Sa rah

Cisco

02_384688-ftoc.qxp

9/5/08

3

chapter

6:14 PM

Page vii

Connecting Devices to Your Mac

Connect Your Mac to an External Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Connect a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Connect a Fax Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Connect an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Connect an iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Connect an Imaging Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Connect a Bluetooth Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Connect Your Mac to Another Mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

4

chapter

Learning Mac Basics

Explore the OS X Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Tour the Dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Start a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Switch Between Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Tour a Program Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Select a Command from a Pull-Down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Applications!!

Select a Command Using a Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Select Options with Dialog Box Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

SAFARI

iCHAT

EMAIL

Save a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Open a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Print a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Edit Document Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Copy a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Move a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Rename a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Delete a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

iC HA T

iCH AT

T iCHA

T iCHA

iCH AT iCHAT

T iCHA

02_384688-ftoc.qxp

9/5/08

6:14 PM

Page viii

Table of Contents

5

chapter

Playing and Organizing Music

Open and Close iTunes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Understanding the iTunes Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Navigate the iTunes Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Play a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Adjust the Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Play a Music CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Import Tracks from a Music CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Create a Playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Burn Music Files to a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Edit Song Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Purchase Music from the iTunes Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Listen to an Internet Radio Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Subscribe to a Podcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

6

chapter

Viewing and Editing Your Photos

View a Preview of a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 View a Slideshow of Your Photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Open and Close iPhoto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Import Photos from a Digital Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 View Your Photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Create an Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Crop a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Rotate a Photo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Straighten a Photo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Remove Red-Eye from a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Enhance a Photo with an Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 E-mail a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Take Your Picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Create a DVD of Your Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Audiobooks Radio Music Podcasts

02_384688-ftoc.qxp

9/5/08

7

chapter

6:14 PM

Page ix

Creating a Movie

Open and Close iMovie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Import a Video File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Add Video Clips to Your Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Trim a Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Add a Transition Between Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Add a Photo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Add a Music Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Record a Voiceover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Add Titles and Credits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Play the Movie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Create a DVD of Your Movie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

8

chapter

Surfing the World Wide Web

Open and Close Safari . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Select a Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Saltwater Fish http://www.saltwaterfish.com

Enter a Web Page Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Open a Web Page in a Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Navigate Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

google

Angelfish Clownfish Lionfish Bicinctus Clownfish

Navigate with the History List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Change Your Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Bookmark Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Search for Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Download a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

http://www.saltwaterfish.com/clownfish

google

02_384688-ftoc.qxp

9/5/08

6:14 PM

Page x

Table of Contents

9

chapter

Communicating via E-mail and Chat

Open and Close Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Add an E-mail Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Send an E-Mail Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Add a File Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Add a Signature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Receive and Read E-mail Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Reply to a Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Forward a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Open and Close iChat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Add a Buddy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Start a Text Chat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Start an Audio Chat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

10

chapter

Working with Contacts and Appointments

Open and Close Address Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Add a New Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Edit a Contact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Create a Contact Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Open and Close iCal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Navigate the Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Create an Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Create a Repeating Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Create a To-Do Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Beth Hu m

phry

Produc tio Superv n iso Keyline r Pr Adobe, inters Californ ia

Dennis Wa gner Staff Psych Haven Hi ologist lls Louisville, Kentucky

r

Carte

lf e Ro er nag Ma d Bank nch o Bra onwo linois Il tt Co ville, n re G

Ann

y Gilfo ert t ran stau ner Ow our Re Tower La T olving irgini V v 1 Re sburg, Hap

Rob

02_384688-ftoc.qxp

9/5/08

6:14 PM

11

chapter

Page xi

Working with Your MobileMe Account

Log in to MobileMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Send and Receive MobileMe Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Work with MobileMe Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Manage Your Schedule with MobileMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Share Photos with MobileMe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Upload Files to Your iDisk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Synchronize Your Mac with MobileMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

12

chapter

Customizing Your Mac

Display System Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Change the Desktop Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Activate the Screen Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Set Your Mac’s Sleep Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Change the Display Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Change Your Mac’s Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Customize the Dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Add an Icon to the Dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Hide the Dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Add a Widget to the Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

@

02_384688-ftoc.qxp

9/5/08

6:14 PM

Page xii

Table of Contents

13

chapter

Networking with Your Mac

Understanding Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Connect to a Wireless Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Connect to a Network Resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Turn On File and Printer Sharing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Share a Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Share a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Add a Shared Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

14

chapter

Maintaining Your Mac

Empty the Trash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Organize Your Desktop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

ay Frid y a d rs at Thu upd sday Uninstall Unused Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 e n d rds e Wo :1 ay W 3 d te: a d s p u @ e Set a Software Update Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 u

Check Hard Disk Free Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Update Software by Hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Remove Unneeded Login Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Configure Time Machine Backups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Restore Files Using Time Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Recondition Your Mac Notebook Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

6 7 4 1 3 1 2 11 0 1 10 92 DrawPro3 . @ 2:00 p.m

: update

hiz PhotoW @ .m. 12:00 a

02_384688-ftoc.qxp

9/5/08

15

chapter

6:14 PM

Page xiii

Troubleshooting Your Mac

Restart Your Mac. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Unlock System Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Force a Stuck Program to Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Repair a Corrupt Preferences File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Reset a Forgotten Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Repair Disk Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Repair a Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Reinstall Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

FORCE QUIT

03_384688-flast.qxp

9/5/08

6:13 PM

Page xiv

How to use this book How to Use this Teach Yourself VISUALLY Book Do you look at the pictures in a book or newspaper before anything else on a page? Would you rather see an image instead of read about how to do something? Search no further. This book is for you. Opening Teach Yourself VISUALLY Macs allows you to read less and learn more about Macs.

Who Needs This Book

e-mail account and to send and receive messages, as well as how to use the iChat application to exchange instant messages. In Chapter 10, Working with Contacts and Appointments, you learn how to manage your contacts using the Address Book application, and how to track appointments using the iCal application. Chapter 11, Working with Your MobileMe Account, gives you the basics of logging in and using your MobileMe account.

This book is for a reader who has never used a Mac. It is also for more computer literate individuals who want to expand their knowledge of the different features that Macs offer.

In Chapter 12, Customizing Your Mac, you find out various ways to personalize your Mac, including changing the desktop background, choosing a screen saver, and customizing the Dock.

Book Organization

Chapter 13, Networking with Your Mac, tells you everything you need to know to connect your Mac to a network and to use the resources on that network.

Teach Yourself VISUALLY Macs has 15 chapters. Chapter 1, Learning About Mac Types, introduces you to the Mac and takes you through the various types of Macs that are available. In Chapter 2, Understanding What You Can Do with Your Mac, you learn about the kinds of tasks you can accomplish with a Mac computer. Chapter 3, Connecting Devices to Your Mac, shows you how to connect various devices to your Mac, including a printer, modem, iPod, iPhone, and digital camera. In Chapter 4, Learning Mac Basics, you go through the fundamental techniques that you need to know to use your Mac, including selecting commands, opening and saving documents, and editing text. Chapter 5, Playing and Organizing Music, teaches you how to work with music on your Mac using the iTunes application. Chapter 6, Viewing and Editing Your Photos, shows you how to view photos on your Mac, and how to import and edit photos using the iPhoto application. In Chapter 7, Creating a Movie, you learn how to import video footage into your Mac and then turn that footage into a digital movie complete with transitions, music, titles, and more. Chapter 8, Surfing the World Wide Web, teaches you the basics of getting around the World Wide Web using Safari, the browser that comes with your Mac. Chapter 9, Communicating via E-mail and Chat, shows you how to use your Mac’s Mail program to set up an

Chapter 14, Maintaining Your Mac, takes you through a series of tasks designed to help keep your Mac running smoothly and efficiently. In Chapter 15, Troubleshooting Your Mac, you learn about several of the most common Mac problems and how to solve them.

Chapter Organization This book consists of sections, all listed in the book’s table of contents. A section is a set of steps that show you how to complete a specific computer task. Each section, usually contained on two facing pages, has an introduction to the task at hand, a set of fullcolor screen shots and steps that walk you through the task, and a set of tips. This format allows you to quickly look at a topic of interest and learn it instantly. Chapters group together three or more sections with a common theme. A chapter may also contain pages that give you the background information needed to understand the sections in a chapter.

What You Need to Use This Book The first two chapters of this book give you a general overview of Macs, so they are suitable for someone looking to purchase a Mac. For the rest of the book, you need to have a Mac computer to try out the tasks in each section. Ideally, you should have a recent Mac with an Intel processor, although readers with older

03_384688-flast.qxp

9/5/08

6:13 PM

Page 1

PowerPC-based Macs can still follow along. Your Mac should be running Mac OS X 10.5 (Leopard), although the steps and screen shots for older versions of Mac OS X are similar.

Numbered Steps

Using the Mouse

Bulleted Steps

This book uses the following conventions to describe the actions you perform when using the mouse:

These steps point out various optional features. You do not have to perform these steps; they simply give additional information about a feature.

Click Press your left mouse button once. You generally click your mouse on something to select something on the screen. Double-click Press your left mouse button twice. Double-clicking something on the computer screen generally opens whatever item you have double-clicked.

You must perform the instructions in numbered steps in order to successfully complete a section and achieve the final results.

Indented Text Indented text tells you what the program does in response to you following a numbered step. For example, if you click a certain menu command, a dialog box may appear, or a window may open. Indented text may also tell you what the final result is when you follow a set of numbered steps. Notes

Right-click Press your right mouse button if you have a right-click mouse. When you right-click anything on the computer screen, the program displays a shortcut menu containing commands specific to the selected item. Click and Drag, and Release the Mouse Move your mouse pointer and hover it over an item on the screen. Press and hold down the left mouse button. Now, move the mouse to where you want to place the item and then release the button. You use this method to move an item from one area of the computer screen to another.

The Conventions in This Book A number of typographic and layout styles have been used throughout Teach Yourself VISUALLY Macs to distinguish different types of information.

Notes give additional information. They may describe special conditions that may occur during an operation. They may warn you of a situation that you want to avoid, for example the loss of data. A note may also cross reference a related area of the book. A cross reference may guide you to another chapter, or another section with the current chapter. Icons and buttons Icons and buttons are graphical representations within the text. They show you exactly what you need to click to perform a step. You can easily identify the tips in any section by looking for the TIPS icon. Tips offer additional information, including tips, hints, and tricks. You can use the TIPS information to go beyond what you have learn learned in the steps.

Bold

Operating System Difference

Bold type represents the names of commands and options that you interact with. Bold type also indicates text and numbers that you must type into a dialog box or window.

The text and screen shots in this book are based on Mac OS X 10.5, also known as Leopard. If your Mac uses an earlier version of Mac OS X, such as 10.4 (Tiger) or 10.3 (Panther), then the text and screen shots may be slightly different than what you encounter on your Mac.

Italics

Italic words introduce a new term and are followed by a definition.

04_384688-ch01.qxp

9/5/08

6:14 PM

Page 2

chapter

1

Learning about Mac Types 1 0 1 cs a M

r’s e n in de g Be i A Gu

Are you ready to learn about the Mac? This chapter gets you off to a great start by showing you the different types of Macs that are available. You learn about the general Mac types and you learn about the specific Mac models and what features they offer.

04_384688-ch01.qxp

9/5/08

6:14 PM

Page 3

Understanding Mac Types ..................................4 Learn about the iMac ..........................................6 Delve into the Mac Mini......................................8 Get to Know the Mac Pro ................................10 Check Out the MacBook Pro............................12 Tour the MacBook Air........................................14 Take a Look at the MacBook ..........................16

04_384688-ch01.qxp

9/5/08

6:14 PM

Page 4

Understanding Mac Types

Before you learn about the specific Mac models Apple offers, it is a good idea to take a step back and look at the general types of Macs that are available.

Desktop Macs A desktop Mac is a Macintosh computer that is designed to sit on your desk. In most cases, you connect the desktop Mac to a separate keyboard, mouse, and monitor. The exception here is the iMac model, which comes with a built-in monitor. Also, the Mac Pro model is quite large, so many people place the system unit on the floor.

Portable Macs A portable Mac is a Macintosh computer that you can take with you when you leave your home or office. A portable Mac — also called a notebook Mac — comes with a keyboard, mouse, and monitor built in, so it is easy to use in almost any location. A portable Mac also comes with a battery, so you can use it even in places where there is no power outlet available.

Finder File Edit View Go Window Help Mon 12:00 PM

Busine ss Clas s

4

04_384688-ch01.qxp

9/5/08

6:14 PM

Page 5

Learning about Mac Types

PowerPC Macs From about 1994 to early 2006, all Mac models used a central processing unit (CPU; the “brain” of the computer) called the PowerPC, which was made jointly by IBM and Motorola. Apple no longer uses PowerPC CPUs, but if you are in the market for a used Mac, note that it may come with the PowerPC chip.

1

chapter

POWE PC! R

Intel Macs All the current Mac models use a CPU made by Intel Corporation. Apple began the transition from PowerPC to Intel in early 2006, and every Mac made since about August 2006 comes with an Intel CPU. The Intel processors are faster and more reliable than the PowerPC chips, and they use less power, which improves battery life in portable Macs.

Determine the Mac CPU If you have a Mac and you do not know whether it has an Intel or PowerPC CPU, you can find out. Start your Mac, click the Apple icon in the top-left corner, and then click About This Mac. In the About This Mac window that appears, examine the Processor value.

About This Mac

X Mac OS 10.4.11 Version

Software Update...

PowerPC Processor 1.33 GHz Built-in Memory 256MB Startup Disk

G4

Macintosh HD

More Info...

About Th

is Mac

X MaerscioOn 10S.4.11 V

... Update ftware

So G4 werPC GHz Po -in or 1.33 Built Process ory 256MB tosh HD Mem Macin p Disk Startu

More

Info...

5

04_384688-ch01.qxp

9/5/08

6:15 PM

Page 6

Learn about the iMac

If you are thinking of purchasing an iMac, or just want to know more about this Mac model, this section explains the iMac’s features and concepts.

iMac Overview The iMac is an “all-in-one” computer that combines the system components (the CPU, memory, hard drive, and other internal components) and the screen in a single unit. However, the resulting console is still amazingly thin, so the iMac does not take up very much room on your desk.

01 1 ac iM

r’s e n in de g e i A B Gu

iMac Features The iMac uses an Intel Core 2 Duo processor, a widescreen display (20 or 24 inches wide), a powerful graphics card, a built-in iSight camera and microphone, wired and wireless networking support, and a CD and DVD burner.

The iMac Finder File Edit View Go Window Help

All in one: CPU Memory Hard drive Screen

6

Mon 12:00 PM

04_384688-ch01.qxp

9/5/08

6:15 PM

Page 7

1

chapter

Learning about Mac Types

iMac Ports The back of the iMac has a generous supply of ports that enable you to connect a wide variety of devices.

Audio Out

Audio In

USB

You use the audio out port to play music or other audio through speakers or headphones.

You use the audio in port to bring speech or other audio into the iMac using a microphone, musical instrument, or audio player.

You use the iMac’s three USB ports to connect devices that support USB, including keyboards, mice, printers, cameras, external drives, and iPods.

FireWire 400

You use the FireWire 400 port to connect devices that support FireWire 400, including external hard drives, external DVD drives, and video cameras.

Video Out

Network

FireWire 800

You use the video out port to connect the iMac to an additional display, such as a second monitor, a TV, or a video projector.

You use the network port to connect the iMac to a wired network.

You use the FireWire 800 port to connect devices that support FireWire 800, including external hard drives, external DVD drives, and video cameras.

7

04_384688-ch01.qxp

9/5/08

6:15 PM

Page 8

Delve into the Mac Mini

If you are thinking of purchasing a Mac mini, or just want to know more about this Mac model, this section explains the Mac mini’s features and concepts.

Mac Mini Overview The Mac mini is a scaled-down version of a Mac that includes all the standard components — CPU, memory, hard drive, video card, and DVD drive — in a unit that measures only about 6.5 inches square (and about 2 inches tall). This makes the Mac mini perfect for a work area that does not have very much room.

Mac Mini Features The Mac mini uses an Intel Core 2 Duo processor, an 80GB or 120GB hard drive, wired and wireless networking support, a CD and DVD burner, and numerous ports (see the next page). You need to supply your own keyboard, mouse, and monitor.

+ keyboard mouse

Mac mini

monitor

8

04_384688-ch01.qxp

9/5/08

6:15 PM

Page 9

Learning about Mac Types

1

chapter

Mac Mini Ports The back of the Mac mini has a number of ports that enable you to connect a wide variety of devices.

Network

FireWire 400

Video Out

You use the network port to connect the Mac mini to a wired network.

You use the FireWire 400 port to connect devices that support FireWire 400, including external hard drives, external DVD drives, and video cameras.

You use the video out port to connect the Mac mini to a computer monitor, TV, or other display.

USB

You use the Mac mini’s four USB ports to connect devices that support USB, including keyboards, mice, printers, cameras, external drives, and iPods.

Audio Out

Audio In

You use the audio out port to play music or other audio through speakers or headphones.

You use the audio in port to bring speech or other audio into the Mac mini using a microphone, musical instrument, or audio player.

9

04_384688-ch01.qxp

9/5/08

6:15 PM

Page 10

Get to Know the Mac Pro

If you are thinking of purchasing a Mac Pro, or just want to know more about this Mac model, this section explains the Mac Pro’s features and concepts.

Mac Pro Overview The Mac Pro is the fastest and most powerful of all the Mac models. With a fast CPU, lots of memory, a large hard drive, powerful graphics, and a wide variety of expansion options, the Mac Pro is designed for power users who need maximum performance.

10

Mac Pro Features The Mac Pro uses one or two Intel Xeon quad core processors, which gives the Mac Pro the power of up to eight individual CPUs. It also comes with 2GB of memory, a 320GB hard drive, wired and wireless networking support, a CD and DVD burner, and numerous ports. You can upgrade the Mac Pro with a faster CPU, more memory, and multiple hard drives.

04_384688-ch01.qxp

9/5/08

6:15 PM

Page 11

Learning about Mac Types

1

chapter

Mac Pro Ports The back of the Mac Pro has a number of ports that enable you to connect a wide variety of devices. Note, too, that the Mac Pro also has several ports on the front.

Video Out

USB

You use a video out port to connect the Mac Pro to a computer monitor, TV, or other display.

You use the Mac Pro’s three USB ports to connect devices that support USB, including keyboards, mice, printers, cameras, external drives, and iPods. FireWire 400

You use the FireWire 400 port to connect devices that support FireWire 400, including external hard drives, external DVD drives, and video cameras.

FireWire 800

You use the FireWire 800 port to connect devices that support FireWire 800, including external hard drives, external DVD drives, and video cameras. in

optical audio

out

Optical Audio In

You use the optical audio in port to bring digital audio into the Mac Pro using digital audio devices that support optical connections.

Optical Audio Out

You use the optical audio out port to send digital audio from the Mac Pro to digital audio devices that support optical connections.

Network

Audio Out

Audio In

You use a network port to connect the Mac Pro to a wired network.

You use the audio out port to play music or other audio through speakers or headphones.

You use the audio in port to bring speech or other audio into the Mac Pro using a microphone, musical instrument, or audio player.

11

04_384688-ch01.qxp

9/5/08

6:15 PM

Page 12

Check Out the MacBook Pro

If you are thinking of purchasing a MacBook Pro, or just want to know more about this Mac model, this section explains the MacBook Pro’s features and concepts.

MacBook Pro Overview The MacBook Pro is a portable computer that combines the monitor and keyboard into a single unit. Instead of a mouse, the MacBook Pro uses a trackpad where you move the pointer by sliding your finger along the pad. The latest MacBook Pro models use multi-touch trackpads, where you use gestures to scroll, rotate, and zoom screen objects.

Finder File Edit View Go Window Help Mon 12:00 PM

12

e

MacBook Pro Features The MacBook Pro uses an Intel Core 2 Duo processor, a widescreen display (15.4 or 17 inches measured diagonally), 2GB of memory, a 200GB or 250GB hard drive, a built-in iSight camera and microphone, wired and wireless networking support, and a CD and DVD burner.

04_384688-ch01.qxp

9/5/08

6:15 PM

Page 13

1

chapter

Learning about Mac Types

MacBook Pro Ports The sides of the MacBook Pro have a number of ports that enable you to connect a wide variety of devices.

USB

FireWire 400

You use the MacBook Pro’s USB ports to connect devices that support USB, including keyboards, mice, printers, cameras, external drives, and iPods.

You use the FireWire 400 port to connect devices that support FireWire 400, including external hard drives, external DVD drives, and video cameras.

FireWire 800

You use the FireWire 800 port to connect devices that support FireWire 800, including external hard drives, external DVD drives, and video cameras.

Audio Out

Audio In

Video Out

Network

You use the audio out port to play music or other audio through speakers or headphones.

You use the audio in port to bring speech or other audio into the MacBook Pro using a microphone, musical instrument, or audio player.

You use the video out port to connect the MacBook Pro to an additional display, such as a second monitor, a TV, or a video projector.

You use the network port to connect the MacBook Pro to a wired network.

13

04_384688-ch01.qxp

9/5/08

6:15 PM

Page 14

Tour the MacBook Air

If you are thinking of purchasing a MacBook Air, or just want to know more about this Mac model, this section explains the MacBook Air’s features and concepts. MacBook Air

MacBook Air Overview The MacBook Air is a portable computer that combines the monitor and keyboard into a single unit. Instead of a mouse, the MacBook Air uses a multi-touch trackpad where you move the pointer by sliding your finger along the pad, and where you use gestures to scroll, rotate, and zoom screen objects. With a height of just 0.76 inches, the MacBook Air is the world’s thinnest notebook computer.

MacBook Air Features The MacBook Air uses an Intel Core 2 Duo processor, a 13.3-inch widescreen display (measured diagonally), 2GB of memory, an 80GB hard drive, a built-in iSight camera and microphone, and wireless networking support. Note that the MacBook Air does not come with wired networking support or a CD or DVD drive.

-

14

04_384688-ch01.qxp

9/5/08

6:15 PM

Page 15

Learning about Mac Types

1

chapter

MacBook Air Ports The sides of the MacBook Air have a number of ports that enable you to connect a wide variety of devices. Audio Out

You use the audio out port to play music or other audio through speakers or headphones. Video Out

USB

You use the video out port to connect the MacBook Air to an additional display, such as a second monitor, a TV, or a video projector.

You use the MacBook Air’s USB port to connect a device that supports USB, including a keyboard, mouse, printer, camera, external drive, and iPod.

MacBook Air Accessories MacBook Air SuperDrive The MacBook Air does not come with a built-in CD or DVD drive, but you can attach the external MacBook Air SuperDrive to the USB port. The MacBook Air SuperDrive can read and write DVDs and CDs, and weighs just 0.71 pounds.

USB Ethernet Adapter The MacBook Air does not offer a port for a wired network connection. If you need a faster network connection than the MacBook Air’s built-in wireless networking, or if your local network offers only wired connections, you can attach the USB Network Adapter to the computer’s USB port.

15

04_384688-ch01.qxp

9/5/08

6:15 PM

Page 16

Take a Look at the MacBook Finder File Edit View Go Window Help

If you are thinking of purchasing a MacBook, or just want to know more about this Mac model, this section explains the MacBook’s features and concepts.

MacBook Overview The MacBook is a portable computer that combines the monitor and keyboard into a single unit. Instead of a mouse, the MacBook uses a trackpad where you move the pointer by sliding your finger along the pad.

Finder File Edit View Go Window Help

Mon 12:00 PM

Mon 12:00 PM

MacBook Features The MacBook uses an Intel Core 2 Duo processor, a 13.3-inch widescreen display (measured diagonally), 1GB or 2GB of memory, a 120GB or 160GB hard drive, a built-in iSight camera and microphone, wired and wireless networking support, and a CD and DVD burner.

Finder File Edit View Go Window Help Mon 12:00 PM

cessor Intel Core 2 Duo pro iSight camera & microphone 13.3” widescreen display 1GB or 2GB of memory Finder File Edit View Go Window Help

Mon 12:00 PM

120GB or 160GB hard drive

CD & DVD burner Wired & wirele ss

network support

16

04_384688-ch01.qxp

9/5/08

6:15 PM

Page 17

Learning about Mac Types

1

chapter

MacBook Ports The sides of the MacBook have a number of ports that enable you to connect a wide variety of devices.

Network

Video Out

FireWire 400

You use the network port to connect the MacBook to a wired network.

You use the video out port to connect the MacBook to an additional display, such as a second monitor, a TV, or a video projector.

You use the FireWire 400 port to connect devices that support FireWire 400, including external hard drives, external DVD drives, and video cameras.

USB

Audio Out

Audio In

You use the audio out port to play music or other audio through speakers or headphones.

You use the audio in port to bring speech or other audio into the MacBook using a microphone, musical instrument, or audio player.

You use the MacBook’s USB ports to connect devices that support USB, including keyboards, mice, printers, cameras, external drives, and iPods.

17

05_384688-ch02.qxp

9/5/08

9:11 PM

Page 18

chapter

2

Understanding What You Can Do with Your Mac

1

16

ur

23

30

15

W ed

22

7

29

14

31

24

17

25

10

18

3

26

11

19

27

4

12

Su n

20

5

28

M

13

on

21

6

Tu

Au

es

gu

st

8

Th

20

08

9

Fr i

2

Sa

t

D TH ICT ES ION AR AU Y RU S

My MP3s

Are you ready to learn about what you can do with a Mac? In this chapter you find out about the wide variety of tasks you can perform with your Mac, including creating documents, playing music, organizing photos, contacts, and appointments, surfing the Web, and communicating with others.

05_384688-ch02.qxp

9/5/08

9:11 PM

Page 19

Create Documents..............................................20 Play and Record Music......................................22 View and Organize Your Photos ....................24 Play and Make a Movie or DVD ......................26 Take Advantage of the Web ............................28 Communicate with Others................................30 Organize Your Contacts and Appointments ................................................32

05_384688-ch02.qxp

9/5/08

9:11 PM

Page 20

Create Documents You can use your Mac to create a wide variety of documents, including lists, letters, memos, budgets, forecasts, presentations, and Web pages.

Text Documents You can use text-editing software on your Mac to create simple documents such as lists, notes, instructions, and other items that do not require fonts, colors, or other types of formatting. On your Mac, you can use the TextEdit application to create plain text documents, and the Stickies application to create electronic sticky notes.

ING SHOPPT LIS • Mil k • Bread • Cheese ce oft Offi • Micros

20

ew mes N Tim

B

20 A

ab

Word-Processing Documents You can use word-processing software on your Mac to create letters, résumés, memos, reports, newsletters, brochures, business cards, menus, flyers, invitations, and certificates. Anything that you use to communicate on paper, you can create using your Mac. On your Mac, you can also use TextEdit to create formatted documents. Other examples include Microsoft Word for the Mac and Apple iWork Pages.

A

I My Sp a Repo ce rt by Sa rah

Cisco

05_384688-ch02.qxp

9/5/08

9:11 PM

Page 21

Understanding What You Can Do with Your Mac

Spreadsheets A spreadsheet is a software program that enables you to manipulate numbers and formulas to quickly create powerful mathematical, financial, and statistical models. Your Mac comes with a test-drive version of the Apple iWork Numbers application. Another example is Microsoft Excel for the Mac.

5.4 + 8 = 13.4

Sp rea

7

4 1

0

8

5 2

.

I like Wiley Books because they are fun and informative

ds he

et

9 //

6

3 --

= ++

YOUR N PRESENTATIO PROGRAM

2

chapter

*

16 /3 44 5.2

Presentations A presentation program enables you to build professional-looking slides that you can use to convey your ideas to other people. Your Mac comes with a testdrive version of the Apple iWork Keynote application. Another example is Microsoft PowerPoint for the Mac.

Web Pages You can use Web page-editing software on your Mac to create your own pages to publish to the Web. You can create a personal home page, a blog, or pages to support your business. On your Mac, you can use the iWeb application to create and publish entire Web sites. M y Web P a g e

21

05_384688-ch02.qxp

9/5/08

9:11 PM

Page 22

Play and Record Music Your Mac is a veritable music machine that you can use to organize and play your digital music collection. You can rip music from audio CDs, purchase music online, and even record new tunes.

iTunes Your Mac comes with the iTunes application, which stores your library of digital music files. With iTunes you can play albums and songs, organize tunes into related playlists, download and edit track information, and organize your music to suit your style. You can also use iTunes to listen to Internetbased radio stations.

iTunes Store You can use the iTunes application to connect directly to the online iTunes store, where you can purchase individual songs, usually for 99 cents per song, or entire albums, usually for $9.99 per album. Your Mac downloads the purchased music to your iTunes library, and you can listen to the music on your Mac or add the music to your iPod.

iTunes Sto re

22

05_384688-ch02.qxp

9/5/08

9:11 PM

Page 23

Understanding What You Can Do with Your Mac

My

Import Music from a CD You can add tracks from a music CD to the iTunes library. This enables you to listen to an album without having to put the CD into your CD or DVD drive each time. In iTunes, the process of copying tracks from a CD to your Mac is called importing or ripping.

2

chapter

Record Music Your Mac comes with an application called GarageBand that enables you to record your own tunes. You can attach an instrument such as a guitar or keyboard to your Mac and record your playing. You can also use GarageBand to add accompanying instruments such as drums, bass, piano, or another guitar.

o r i te Favusic M

s iTune Burn Music to a CD You can copy, or burn, music files from your Mac onto a CD. Burning CDs is a great way to create customized CDs that you can listen to on the computer or in a portable device. You can burn music files using the iTunes application or using the GarageBand application.

Synchronize with an iPod You can use the iTunes application to copy some or all of your music library to an iPod, which enables you to play your music while you are walking around or on another audio device that connects to the iPod. When you attach the iPod to your Mac using a USB cable, iTunes automatically synchronizes the iPod according to the settings you specify.

23

05_384688-ch02.qxp

9/5/08

9:11 PM

Page 24

View and Organize Your Photos Your Mac’s high-quality display is perfect for displaying, organizing, and editing your digital photos. You can view photo slideshows, import images from a camera, take snapshots, and edit your photos.

Sunset over Mountains

Photo of Jake A Beautiful Flower

View Photos Your Mac gives you many ways to view your digital photos. If you have Mac OS X 10.5 (Leopard), you can view photos within Finder using the Cover Flow view, or by selecting the photos and pressing . You can also double-click a photo file to open it using the Preview application, or you can open a file using the iPhoto application. Also, both Preview and iPhoto enable you to run photo slideshows.

24

Organize Photos You can use iPhoto to organize your Mac’s collection of digital photos. For example, you can create albums of related photos, and you can create folders in which to store photos. You can also rename and rate photos, apply keywords to photos, flag important photos, and sort photos in various ways.

05_384688-ch02.qxp

9/5/08

9:11 PM

Page 25

Understanding What You Can Do with Your Mac

2

chapter

Import Photos to Your Mac If you have a digital camera attached to your Mac, you can use either the Image Capture application or the iPhoto application to import some or all of the camera’s images to your Mac.

Take Snapshots If your Mac includes an iSight camera or has a digital video camera connected, you can use the Photo Booth application to take snapshots of whatever subject is currently displayed in the camera. You can also apply various effects to the photos.

Edit Photos You can use the iPhoto application to edit your digital photos. You can rotate, crop, or straighten a photo; you can modify a photo’s exposure, contrast, and sharpness; you can fix problems such as red eye and blemishes; and you can add special effects to a photo.

25

05_384688-ch02.qxp

9/5/08

9:11 PM

Page 26

Play and Make a Movie or DVD Your Mac’s solid graphical underpinnings mean that it is a great tool for playing digital movies and DVDs. You can also use your Mac to create your own digital movies and your own DVDs.

Play a DVD If your Mac has a DVD drive, you can use the DVD Player application to play a DVD movie. You can either watch the movie in a window while you work on other things, or you can switch to full-screen mode and watch the movie using the entire screen. DVD Player has features that enable you to control the movie playback and volume.

26

Play a Video File Your Mac comes with an application called QuickTime Player that can play digital video files. The basic version that comes with your Mac enables you to open video files and control the playback and volume. QuickTime Pro — which you can purchase for $29.99 — adds many extra features, including the ability to record movies and audio and to cut and paste scenes.

05_384688-ch02.qxp

9/5/08

9:11 PM

Page 27

Understanding What You Can Do with Your Mac

2

chapter

Play a Movie, TV Show, or Podcast You most often use iTunes to play music, but you can also use it to play video files stored on your Mac, movies, and TV shows that you purchase from the iTunes store, as well as podcasts that you download from the iTunes store or subscribe to online.

Make a Movie Your Mac comes with an application called iMovie that enables you to make your own digital movies. You can import clips from a video camera or video file, add clips to the movie, and rearrange and trim those clips as needed. You can also add transitions between scenes, music and sound effects, titles, and more.

Make a DVD You can use your Mac to create your own custom DVD discs. Using the iDVD application, you can create a DVD project that includes video footage, photos, and audio effects. You can enhance the project with a custom menu, titles, and sophisticated background and text themes. When you are done, you can burn the project to a DVD disc.

CCrreeat atee DDVD VD

27

05_384688-ch02.qxp

9/5/08

9:11 PM

Page 28

Take Advantage of the Web Safari File Edit View History Bookmarks Window Help Google fari RSS Apple - Mac OS X - Sa atures/safari

You can use your Mac to connect to the Internet and access the Web to look for information or news, buy and sell goods, socialize with others, and more.

sx/fe ple.com/maco http://www.ap hoo! News Ya ay eB Amazon Apple .Mac Store Products

Switch

.Mac

Quick Time

Support

Resource veloper Serer De wnloads

iPod + iTunes

Mac OS X

ck s Feedba

Do Hot Apps

S S R i r a f a S

rste e new doo

top is th Your desk

Surf the Web Your Mac comes with a browser application called Safari that you use to surf the Web. With Safari you can navigate Web pages, save favorite Web pages as bookmarks, and view multiple pages in a single window using tabs.

Search for Information If you need information on a specific topic, free Web sites called search engines enable you to quickly search the Web for pages that have the information you require. You can search the Web either by going directly to a search engine site or by using the search feature built into Safari.

tp:/www.wsj.com/public/us

28

p

05_384688-ch02.qxp

9/5/08

9:11 PM

Page 29

2

chapter

Understanding What You Can Do with Your Mac

Read News The Web is home to many sites that enable you to read the latest news. For example, many print sources have Web sites, some magazines exist only online, and there are more recent innovations such as blogs and RSS feeds. Some media sites require that you register to access the articles, but on most sites the registration is free.

Buy and Sell ECommerce — the online buying and selling of goods and services — is a big part of the Web. You can use Web-based stores to purchase books, theater tickets, and even cars, which gives you the convenience of shopping at home, easily comparing prices and features, and having goods delivered to your door. Many sites also enable you to sell or auction your products or household items.

Shoppi

ng.com

es orit Fav

it Ed ck le a Fi B ress d Ad

w Vie h

Tools

Help

- Mic rosoft File Ed Internet it View Explorer Favorite Back s Tool s Help Address http://www

GO

com es. tim .ny ww :/w ttp

click

.shoppin g.

com

GO

the cee eCommerce café OPEN

Socialize The Web offers many opportunities to socialize, whether you are looking for a friend or a date, or you just want some good conversation. However, it is a good idea to observe some common-sense precautions. For example, arrange to meet new friends in public places, supervise all online socializing done by children, and do not give out personal information to strangers.

Take Advantage of MobileMe You can use your Mac to set up a Web-based MobileMe account that enables you to perform many activities online, including exchanging e-mail, maintaining contacts, tracking appointments, sharing photos, and storing files online. You can also synchronize data between your Mac and your MobileMe account.

Sync il Ma

Calendar

Contacts

Phot os

sk iDi

29

05_384688-ch02.qxp

9/5/08

9:11 PM

Page 30

Communicate with Others BIOL OGY

ish Engl n His tro Lati no It ry

You can use your Mac to communicate with other people using online technologies such as e-mail and instant messaging.

Exchange E-mail E-mail is the Internet system that enables you to electronically exchange messages with other Internet users anywhere in the world. To use e-mail, you must have an e-mail account, which is usually supplied by your ISP. The account gives you an e-mail address to which others can send messages. You then set up that account in your Mac’s Mail application.

Exchange E-mail over the Web You can also set up a Web-based e-mail account. Although you can do this using services such as Hotmail.com and Yahoo.com, many Mac users create MobileMe accounts, which include Web-based e-mail. A Web-based account is convenient because it enables you to send and receive messages from any computer that has access to the Internet.

Hi, Paul! How are you? 2

10

24 22 20

8 6 4

26

16 14 12 18

INB OX

30

He y, Paul! to mee t yoNice u!

0 30 2 8

Hi, it’s Paul!

05_384688-ch02.qxp

9/5/08

9:11 PM

Page 31

Understanding What You Can Do with Your Mac

In Zoom Out Tool Mode 1) Page Up Page Down Zoom Drawer Back/Forward Page (of Windows Messenger Instant Messages With Robby Andy Roid

Drawer Back/Forward Page (of 1) Page Up Page Down Zoom In Zoom Out Tool Mode iChat File Edit View Buddies Audio Format Window Help Wed 2:22PM

Instant Messages with Andy

Robby

JAD...IYKWIM Andy Roid

TLGO...TGIF Robby

WYWH

w. ww go. tlin ne om c

.com ingo

www askox . fo com.b rd. ett writin er emoti g/ cons

Roid

.netl www

LTNC, WU? JAD...IYKWIM TLGO...TGIF WYWH

LTNC, WU?

www.askoxfo rd.com

Exchange Instant Messages Instant messaging allows you to contact other people who are online, thus enabling you to have a real-time exchange of messages. Communicating in real time means that if you send a message to another person who is online, that message appears on the person’s computer right away. If that person sends you a response, it appears on your computer right away. On your Mac, you use the iChat application to exchange instant messages.

2

chapter

Audio Chat You can also use the iChat program to audio chat with another person. With an audio chat, you speak into a microphone and your voice is sent over the Internet to the other person who hears you through his or her computer’s speakers. You also hear that person’s voice through your own speakers.

Video Chat You can also use the iChat program to video chat with someone. With a video chat, your image is captured by a video camera — such as the iSight camera built into many Macs — and a microphone captures your voice, and both the video and audio streams are sent over the Internet to the other person. You can also see and hear the other person on your Mac.

Hey Jake!

1

31

05_384688-ch02.qxp

9/5/08

9:11 PM

Page 32

Organize Your Contacts and Appointments

You can use your Mac to help you organize your life. Specifically, your Mac comes with tools that enable you to manage your contacts and schedule your appointments.

Maintain Your Address Book Your Mac comes with an application called Address Book that enables you to store information about your contacts. For each contact, you can store data such as the person’s name, address, telephone number, e-mail address, birthday, and more.

32

Work with Contacts You can use your Address Book items to perform many different contact-related tasks. For example, you can use Mail to send a message either to individual contacts or to a contact group, which is an Address Book item that contains multiple contacts. Also, you can use iCal to set up a meeting with a contact.

05_384688-ch02.qxp

9/5/08

9:11 PM

Page 33

Understanding What You Can Do with Your Mac

Schedule an Appointment You can help organize your life by using your Mac to record your appointments on the date and time they occur. You do this using the iCal application, which uses an electronic calendar to store your appointments. You can even configure iCal to display a reminder before an appointment occurs.

2

chapter

Schedule an All-Day Event If an appointment has no set time — for example, a birthday, anniversary, or multiple-day event such as a sales meeting or vacation — you can use iCal to set up the appointment as an all-day event.

AUG

ay

nd

Su

8

ay

d on

M

6 5 4 3 1 12 2 0 1 1 9 1 7 18 8 16 1 4 2 ay

esd

Tu

y

te Pe et he Me at t h c bea

sda dne We

y da urs

Th

ay

id Fr

Schedule a Repeating Appointment If an appointment occurs regularly — for example, once a week or once every three months — you do not need to schedule every appointment by hand. Instead, you can use iCal to configure the activity as a repeating appointment, where you specify the repeat interval. iCal then creates all the future appointments automatically.

Synchronize with MobileMe If you have a MobileMe account, you can synchronize your Mac’s e-mail, contacts, and appointments so that they also appear in the MobileMe’s Mail, Contacts, and Calendar applications. If you have a second Mac, you can use MobileMe to keep your e-mail, contacts, and appointments in sync on both Macs.

33

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:17 PM

Page 34

Connecting Devices to Your Mac When you plug a device into your Mac, most of the time the device works right away. However, there are some devices that require a bit of extra effort on your part to get them connected and configured. This chapter takes you through a few such devices, including an external display, printer, fax, iPod, iPhone, digital camera, and even another Mac.

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:17 PM

Page 35

Connect Your Mac to an External Display....36 Connect a Printer ................................................38 Connect a Fax Modem ......................................42 Connect an iPod..................................................44 Connect an iPhone ............................................46 Connect an Imaging Device ............................48 Connect a Bluetooth Device ............................50 Connect Your Mac to Another Mac................54

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:17 PM

Page 36

Connect Your Mac to an External Display

You can connect your Mac to an external display such as a monitor or a TV. This is essential for machines such as the Mac mini and Mac Pro that do not come with a screen. However, you can also connect an iMac or portable Mac to a larger screen for more viewing area.

The Mac Connection DVI Port The Mac Pro, Mac mini, and MacBook Pro use a regular DVI port to output video.

36

Mini DVI Port The iMac and MacBook use a Mini DVI port. These Macs come with adapters for connecting to VGA or regular DVI displays.

Micro DVI Port The MacBook Air uses a Micro DVI port and comes with adapters for connecting to VGA or regular DVI displays.

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:17 PM

Page 37

Connecting Devices to Your Mac

3

chapter

The Display Connection DVI Port Most computer monitors come with at least one DVI port, although the configuration (the number of holes) may not match what you have on your Mac. Therefore, the cable you use must have connectors that match the ports on both the Mac and the monitor.

VGA Port Most computer monitors come with at least one VGA port. To use such a port with your Mac, you need a cable adapter that converts DVI, Mini DVI, or Micro DVI to VGA.

Composite or S-Video Port Most televisions come with either or both an S-Video port or a composite video port. To use such a port with your Mac, you need a cable adapter that converts DVI, Mini DVI, or Micro DVI to either S-Video or composite video.

Cable Adapters Macs that use either a Mini DVI port or a Micro DVI port come with adapters that enable you to connect these Macs to VGA or regular DVI displays. You can also purchase from Apple an adapter that enables you to connect your Mac to a composite or S-Video display.

37

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:17 PM

Page 38

Connect a Printer When in the Course of human events, necessary for one people to dissolve it becomes bands which have connected them the political And to assume among the powers with another, separate and equal station to whichof the earth, the Nature and of Nature’s God entitle the Laws of respect to the opinions of mankind them, a decent they should declare the causes whichrequires that impel them to the separation.

If you have a printer that you want to use to make hard copies of some of your documents, you must first connect the printer to your Mac.

es com l it be litica ts, po r, he e even the man olve h anot h, th of hu diss wit eart of rse le to them of the Laws cent e Couone peopnnected wers ch the , a dethat th po em hi co e w th es n in for Whe ssary ch have ong thation to entitle requirpel them am nece s whi sume ual st s God ankind ch im band to as and eq ature’ of m es whi and rate d of N inions e caus sepa ure an the op are th Nat ect to ld decl . resp shou paration they the se to

Floonrs Pla

Connect a Printer

1 Connect the printer’s USB cable to a free USB port on your Mac, and then turn on the printer.

2 Click the Apple icon ( ). 3 Click System Preferences. Note: You can also click the System Preferences icon ( ) in the dock.

38

2 3

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:17 PM

Page 39

Connecting Devices to Your Mac

3

chapter

The System Preferences appear.

4 Click Print & Fax.

4

The Print & Fax preferences appear. l If you see your printer in the Printers list, skip the rest of the steps in this section.

5 Click Add ( ). The Printer Browser dialog box appears.

5

What do I do if my printer has a parallel port instead of a USB port? Although almost all new printers come with USB ports, many older printers use a parallel (also called LPT) port instead. No Mac has a corresponding printer port, so you need to purchase a parallel-to-USB adapter cable, which has a parallel connector on one end and a USB connector on the other.

➥

continued

39

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:17 PM

Page 40

Connect a Printer (continued) Fortunately, the vast majority of the time your Mac will recognize your printer immediately after you attach it to the USB port, so in most cases you will not need to use the extra steps in this section.

Connect a Printer (continued)

6 Click Default. 7 In the Printer Name list, click your printer.

6 7

8 Use the Name text box to edit the printer name.

9 If the Print Using list shows the wrong printer, click and then click the correct printer.

8 9

40

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:17 PM

Page 41

Connecting Devices to Your Mac

3

chapter

0 Click Add.

0 l OS X adds the printer to the Printers list.

!

! Click Close ( ).

IN PR

R ER TTE

First, insert the disc that came with your printer and then run the installation program. If that does not work, follow Steps 1 to 7 and then, in the Print Using list, click and then click Other. Click the printer disc, locate and choose the printer driver, and then click Open.

What if I do not have a printer disc?

If you do not have a printer disc, or if SS C the disc does not contain Mac drivers, C visit the printer manufacturer’s Web site and download the drivers you need. If you cannot get drivers for the printer (many printer manufacturers do not bother writing Mac drivers), you may still be able to use the printer by choosing Generic PostScript Printer in the Print Using list. DI

What do I do if I do not see my printer in the Print Using list?

41

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:18 PM

Page 42

Connect a Fax Modem If you want to send or receive faxes using your Mac, then you must connect an external fax modem, such as Apple’s USB Modem.

Some older Macs came with an internal fax modem already installed, so you may not need to connect an external modem. Connect a Fax Modem

1 Connect the fax modem to a free USB port on your Mac.

2 Follow Steps 2 to 8 in the previous section to display the Printer Browser dialog box.

3 Click Fax. Note: If you are using a version of OS X earlier than Leopard (10.5), click Default Browser, instead.

4 In the Printer Name list, click your modem.

42

3 4

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:18 PM

Page 43

Connecting Devices to Your Mac

3

chapter

5 Use the Name text box to edit the modem name.

6 Click Add.

5

6 l OS X adds the modem to the Printers list.

7 Click Close

7

.

What do I do if my modem has a serial port instead of a USB port? Although almost all new modems come with USB ports, many older modems use a serial port instead. No Mac has a corresponding serial port, so you need to purchase a serial-to-USB adapter or cable, which has a serial connector on one end and a USB connector on the other.

43

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:18 PM

Page 44

Connect an iPod Syncing iP o

d

To synchronize some or all of your iTunes library with your iPod, you need to connect the iPod to your Mac.

Do not disconnect ! Do not disconne ct

To connect an iPod you will need the USB cable that came as part of the iPod package. Connect an iPod CONNECT THE IPOD

1 Attach the USB connector to a free USB port on your Mac.

1 2 Attach the other end of the USB cable to the iPod’s port. Your Mac launches iTunes and automatically begins synchronizing the iPod.

2

44

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:18 PM

Page 45

Connecting Devices to Your Mac

3

chapter

DISCONNECT THE IPOD

1 In iTunes, click the eject button (

) beside your iPod’s name.

iTunes begins releasing the iPod. Note: See the following Tip to learn when it is safe to disconnect the cable from the iPod.

1

2 Pinch the sides of the connector and then pull the connector away from the iPod.

3 Disconnect the cable from the Mac’s USB port. Note: If your Mac has two or more free USB ports and you synchronize your iPod frequently, consider leaving the cable plugged into a USB port for easier iPod connections in the future.

2

Do I always have to eject my iPod before disconnecting it? No, not always. You must first eject the iPod if the iPod screen says “Do not disconnect,” “Eject Before Disconnecting,” or “Sync in Progress.” You can safely disconnect the cable from your iPod if the iPod screen says, “OK to disconnect,” “Charging,” “Charged,” or you see the iPod main menu screen.

45

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:18 PM

Page 46

Connect an iPhone To synchronize some or all of your iTunes library, Address Book contacts, iCal appointments, Safari bookmarks, and e-mail account settings with your iPhone, you need to connect the iPhone to your Mac.

ne

Syncing iPho iPod

9:35 PM

rogress

Sync in P

slide to

To connect an iPhone you will need the USB cable and, optionally, the dock that came with the iPhone package.

Do not disconnect

cancel

Connect an iPhone CONNECT THE IPHONE DIRECTLY

1 Attach the USB connector to a free USB port on your Mac.

1 2 Attach the other end of the USB cable to the iPhone’s port. Your Mac launches iTunes and automatically begins synchronizing the iPhone.

2

46

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:18 PM

Page 47

3

chapter

Connecting Devices to Your Mac CONNECT THE IPHONE USING THE DOCK

1 Attach the USB connector to a free USB port on your Mac.

1 2 Attach the other end of the USB cable to the iPhone dock’s port.

2 3 Insert the iPhone into the dock. Your Mac launches iTunes and automatically begins synchronizing the iPhone.

3

How do I disconnect the iPhone? First, make sure that the iPhone is not currently synchronizing, in which case it shows “Sync in Progress” on the screen. When the screen says “iPhone sync is complete,” you can disconnect the iPhone. In iTunes, click the eject button ( ) beside your iPhone’s name. If you are using the USB cable, pinch the sides of the iPhone connector and then pull the connector away from the iPhone. If you are using the dock, lift the iPhone out of the dock.

iPod

9:35 PM

Sync in Progress

slide to cancel

47

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:18 PM

Page 48

Connect an Imaging Device To import photos from a digital camera, movies from a digital video camera, or images from a scanner, you need to connect the imaging device to your Mac.

Most digital cameras and scanners connect using a USB cable. Most digital video cameras connect using a FireWire cable. Connect an Imaging Device

1 Connect one end of the cable to the imaging device and the other end to your Mac. Note: If you see either iPhoto (for a digital camera) or iMovie (for a digital video camera), then your Mac has recognized your device and you can skip the rest of these steps.

1

1

2 Click the Finder icon ( ) in the Dock.

3 Click Applications. 4 Double-click Image Capture. 3

4

48

2

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:18 PM

Page 49

Connecting Devices to Your Mac

3

chapter

5

The Image Capture application appears.

6

5 Click Devices. 6 Click Browse Devices. Note: You can also press

+B.

7 Click the Connected check box beside the imaging device ( changes to ).

8

Your Mac launches either iPhoto (for a digital camera) or iMovie (for a digital video camera).

7

Note: If you are connecting a scanner, be sure to also click the Use TWAIN software check box ( changes to ).

8 Click

.

What is TWAIN software? TWAIN is a software technology that enables applications such as iPhoto to communicate with a document scanner. (Despite the uppercase letters, TWAIN is not an acronym, although some people jokingly refer to it as Technology Without An Interesting Name.) Your scanner came with a disc that includes the TWAIN software, and you may need to install that software to use your scanner with your Mac.

Why does Image Capture not detect my FireWire digital camcorder? Most FireWire-compatible digital camcorders are compatible with Macs, but not all. For example, many Sony and JVC digital camcorders do not work with Macs. If you are looking to buy a camcorder, be sure to do some research on the Web to make sure the camcorder you want is Mac-compatible.

49

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:18 PM

Page 50

Connect a Bluetooth Device You can make wireless connections to devices such as mice, keyboards, headsets, and cell phones by using the Bluetooth networking technology. For Bluetooth connections to work, your Mac must support Bluetooth (all newer Macs do) and your device must be Bluetooth-enabled. Connect a Bluetooth Device CONNECT A GENERIC BLUETOOTH DEVICE

1

1 Click the Bluetooth status icon (

).

2 Click Set up Bluetooth Device.

2 The Bluetooth Setup Assistant appears.

3 Click Continue.

3

50

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:19 PM

Page 51

Connecting Devices to Your Mac

3

chapter

The Select Device Type dialog box appears.

4 Click the type of Bluetooth device you are going to connect (

changes to

).

5 Click Continue.

4

5 6 Perform whatever steps are necessary to make your Bluetooth device discoverable. Note: For example, if you are connecting a Bluetooth mouse, the device often has a separate switch or button that makes the mouse discoverable, so you need to turn on that switch or press that button.

l When the Bluetooth Setup Assistant discovers the device, it displays the device name.

7

7 Click Continue. 8 Perform the steps required to pair your Mac and your device. Note: See the next two pages for the pairing instructions for a keyboard, headset, and cell phone. A Bluetooth mouse does not require any extra pairing steps.

Your Mac connects with the device.

9 Click Quit. 9

What does it mean to make a device “discoverable”? This means that you configure the device to broadcast that it is available for a Bluetooth connection. Controlling the broadcast is important because you usually want to use a Bluetooth device such as a mouse or keyboard with only a single computer. By controlling when the device is discoverable, you ensure that it works only with the computer you want it to.

What does “pairing” mean? As a security precaution, many Bluetooth devices do not PASSWORD connect automatically to other devices. This makes sense because otherwise it means a stranger with a Bluetooth device could connect to your cell phone or even your Mac. To prevent this, most Bluetooth devices require you to enter a password before the connection is made. This is known as pairing the two devices.

********

➥

continued

51

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:19 PM

Page 52

Connect a Bluetooth Device (continued) In most cases, pairing is accomplished by your Mac generating an 8-digit passkey that you must then type into the Bluetooth device (assuming that it has some kind of keypad). In other cases, the device comes with a default passkey that you must enter into your Mac to set up the pairing.

ENTER PASSKEY

Connect a Bluetooth Device (continued) CONNECT A BLUETOOTH KEYBOARD

1 Turn the keyboard on, if required. 2 Turn on the switch that makes the keyboard discoverable, if required.

3 Follow Steps 1 to 7 from earlier in this

4

section. Note: In the Select Device Type dialog box, click the Keyboard option ( changes to ).

The Bluetooth Keyboard Set Up dialog box appears.

4 Use the Bluetooth keyboard to type the displayed passkey. CONNECT A BLUETOOTH HEADSET

1 Turn on the headset. 2 Turn on the switch that makes the headset discoverable.

3 Follow Steps 1 to 7 from earlier in this section. Note: In the Select Device Type dialog box, click the Headset option ( changes to ).

The Bluetooth Headset Set Up dialog box appears.

4 Use the Passkey text box to type the headset’s passkey.

52

4

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:19 PM

Page 53

Connecting Devices to Your Mac

3

chapter

CONNECT A BLUETOOTH CELL PHONE

1 Turn on the cell phone. 2 Make the cell phone discoverable. 3 Follow Steps 1 to 7 from earlier in 4

this section. Note: In the Select Device Type dialog box, click the Mobile phone option ( changes to ).

The Bluetooth Mobile Phone Set Up dialog box appears.

4 Use the Bluetooth phone’s keypad to type the displayed passkey. The Bluetooth Setup Assistant displays a list of services that your cell phone supports.

5 Deactivate the check box for any

5

service you do not want to use ( changes to ).

6 Click Continue.

6 How do I remove a Bluetooth device? Follow these steps:

1 2

Click

in the menu bar.

Click Open Bluetooth Preferences.

You can also click Bluetooth.

, click System Preferences, and then click

The Bluetooth preferences appear.

3 4

3

Click the device you want to remove. Click Remove (

4

).

Your Mac asks you to confirm.

5

Click Remove.

Your Mac removes the device.

53

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:19 PM

Page 54

Connect Your Mac to Another Mac You can share data such as documents, bookmarks, and downloads between two Macs by connecting those Macs using a network cable or a FireWire cable.

Finder File Edit View Go Window Help

Mon 12:00 PM

This task assumes that you do not have a local area network set up, so you need to connect the two Macs directly. In either case, you must enable file sharing to share data between the Macs. Connect Your Mac to Another Mac CONNECT USING A NETWORK CABLE

1 Attach one of the network cable’s connectors to the network port on one of the Macs.

2 Attach the other network cable connector to the network port on the other Mac.

2

1

CONNECT USING A FIREWIRE CABLE

1 Attach one of the FireWire cable’s connectors to the FireWire port on one of the Macs.

2 Attach the other FireWire cable connector to the FireWire port on the other Mac.

54

2

1

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:19 PM

Page 55

Connecting Devices to Your Mac ENABLE FILE SHARING

1 Click . 2 Click System Preferences.

3

chapter

1 2

The System Preferences window appears.

3 Click Sharing.

3

Can I use a regular network cable? Yes, for many Macs. However, some older Macs require a special crossover cable. You must use such a cable if you want to connect any of the Macs in the following list: eMac

iMac (Flat Panel)

Power Mac G4 Cube

iBook

iMac (Slot Loading)

iBook (FireWire)

iMac (Summer 2000)

Power Macintosh G3 (Blue and White)

iMac

iMac (Summer 2001)

PowerBook (FireWire)

iMac (17-inch Flat Panel)

Power Mac G4 (AGP Graphics)

iMac (Early 2001)

Power Mac G4 (PCI Graphics)

PowerBook G3 Series (Bronze Keyboard)

➥

continued

55

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:19 PM

Page 56

Connect Your Mac to Another Mac (continued) You must enable file sharing on both Macs. Once you have done that, you can see the files shared on the other Mac by accessing Finder’s Network folder.

Finder File Edit View Go Window Help

Connect Your Mac to Another Mac (continued)

5

The Sharing preferences appear.

4 Click File Sharing ( changes to

).

Note: See the Tip on the following page to learn how to share other folders on your Mac.

5 Click

.

4

VIEW THE OTHER MAC’S FILES

1 Click . 2 Click the icon for the other Mac. Note: If you do not see an icon for the other Mac, click Go and then click Network, or press + +K.

56

2

1

Mon 12:00 PM

06_384688-ch03.qxp

9/5/08

6:19 PM

Page 57

Connecting Devices to Your Mac

3

chapter

l Your Mac connects to the other Mac using the Guest account.

3 Click Connect As. 3

Your Mac prompts you to log in to the other Mac.

4 Use the Name text box to type the user name of an account on the other Mac.

4

5 Use the Password text box to type the

5

password of an account on the other Mac.

6

6 Click Connect. Your Mac logs in to the other Mac. l You see the folder associated with the user account that you used to log in to the other Mac.

7 Click a folder to see and work with its contents.

7

How do I share other folders? By default, your Mac shares just your user account’s Public folder. Follow these steps to share another folder:

1 2

Click

.

5

Click System Preferences. The System Preferences window appears.

3 4 5 6

Click Sharing. Under the Shared Folders list, click Click the folder you want to share.

.

6

Click Add.

57

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:40 PM

Page 58

chapter

4

Learning Mac Basics Finder

File Ed it View GO Win dow He lp Back Forward Enclosing Fold er

[ ]

C H K A U

G K

The OS X operating system is installed on all new Macintosh computers. You can use OS X to start programs, manage files, connect to the Internet, and perform computer maintenance, and so it is important to have a basic understanding of how OS X works.

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:40 PM

Page 59

Explore the OS X Screen ..................................60 Tour the Dock ......................................................61 Start a Program ..................................................62 Switch Between Programs ..............................64 Tour a Program Window ..................................65 Select a Command from a Pull-Down Menu ........................................66 Select a Command Using a Toolbar ..............67 Select Options with Dialog Box Controls ....68 Save a Document ................................................70 Open a Document ..............................................71 Print a Document................................................72 Edit Document Text ............................................74 Copy a File ............................................................78 Move a File ..........................................................79 Rename a File......................................................80 Delete a File ........................................................81

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:40 PM

Page 60

Explore the OS X Screen Before you can begin to understand how the OS X operating system works, you should become familiar with the basic screen elements.

Menu Bar The menu bar contains the pull-down menus for OS X and most OS X software.

Desktop This is the OS X work area. It is where you work with your programs and documents.

Mouse Pointer When you move your mouse, the pointer moves along with it.

Desktop Icon An icon on the desktop represents a program or an OS X feature on your computer. This can be a disk drive, a CD or DVD, or a document.

Dock The dock contains several icons, each of which gives you quick access to some commonly used programs.

60

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:40 PM

Page 61

Tour the Dock

Learning Mac Basics

4

chapter

The Dock gives you one-click access to programs, folders, and documents.

Finder You use Finder to work with the files on your computer.

Safari You use Safari to browse the World Wide Web on the Internet.

Dashboard You use Dashboard to access several cool and handy mini applications called widgets.

iChat You use iChat to converse with other people in real time by sending each other text messages.

Mail You use Mail to send and receive e-mail messages.

Address Book You use the Address Book to store people’s names, addresses, phone numbers, and other contact information.

iMovie You use iMovie to import and edit digital video movies.

iDVD You use iDVD to burn images or video to a DVD disc.

QuickTime Player You use QuickTime Player to play audio and video files, music CDs, and other media.

Apple Mac OS X The Apple Mac OS X icon takes you to the World Wide Web page for OS X.

System Preferences You use System Preferences to customize your Mac.

Documents You use Documents to display the contents of your Documents folder.

Time Machine You use Time Machine to access backups of your files.

Downloads You use Downloads to display the contents of your Downloads folder.

GarageBand You use GarageBand to create songs, podcasts, and other audio files. iWeb You use iWeb to create Web pages. iCal You use iCal to record upcoming appointments, birthdays, meetings, and other events.

iTunes You use iTunes to play music files and audio CDs and to add music to your iPod. iPhoto You use iPhoto to import and edit digital photos and other images.

Trash You use the Trash to delete files.

61

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:40 PM

Page 62

Start a Program To work with any program, you must first tell OS X which program you want to run. OS X then launches the program and displays it on the desktop.

Start a Program

1 Click the Finder icon ( ). If the program that you want to start has an icon in the Dock, you can click the icon to start the program and skip the rest of these steps.

1 The Finder window appears.

2 Click Applications. Note: You can also navigate to Applications in any Finder window by pressing + + .

2

62

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:40 PM

Page 63

Learning Mac Basics

4

chapter

The Applications window appears.

3 Double-click the icon of the program that you want to start.

3

If you see a folder icon ( ), it means that the program resides in its own folder, a storage area on the computer. Double-click to open the folder and then double-click the program icon.

l The program appears on the desktop. l OS X adds a button for the program to the Dock and displays a blue smudge beneath the program icon to remind you that the program is running. l The menu bar displays the menus associated with the program.

How do I add an icon to the Dock for a program I use frequently? First, start the program as described in Steps 1 to 3. Ctrl+click or right-click the program’s Dock icon and then click Keep In Dock.

How do I shut down a running program?

quit

The easiest way is to Ctrl+click or right-click the program’s Dock icon and then click Quit. Alternatively, you can press + .

63

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:40 PM

Page 64

Switch Between Programs Applications!!

With OS X, if you are multitasking — running two or more programs at once — you can easily switch from one program to another.

SAFARI

iC HA T

iCH AT

Switch Between Programs

1 Click the Dock icon of the program to which you want to switch.

1 l OS X brings the program’s windows to the foreground. l The menu bar displays the menus associated with the program. Note: To switch between windows from the keyboard, press and hold and repeatedly press until the window that you want is highlighted in the list of running programs. Release to switch to the window.

64

iCHAT

T iCHA

T iCHA

iCH AT iCHAT

EMAIL

T iCHA

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:41 PM

Page 65

Tour a Program Window

Learning Mac Basics

4

chapter

You work with a program by accessing the various features in the program window. Close Button Click the Close button ( ) to remove the program window from the desktop, usually without exiting the program.

Minimize Button Click the Minimize button ( ) to remove the window from the desktop and display an icon for the currently open document in the right side of the Dock. The window is still open, but not active.

Maximize Button Click the Maximize button ( ) to enlarge the window so it can display all of its content.

Title Bar The title bar displays the name of the program. In some programs, the title bar also displays the name of the open document. To move the window, click and drag the title bar.

Toolbar The toolbar contains buttons that offer easy access to common program commands and features.

Show/Hide Toolbar Click to toggle the toolbar on and off.

Resize Button Click and drag in the lower-right corner of the window to make the window larger or smaller.

Horizontal Scroll Bar Use the horizontal scroll bar to navigate left and right in a document. Click Scroll Left ( ) to navigate left, and click Scroll Right ( ) to navigate right.

Vertical Scroll Bar Use the vertical scroll bar to navigate up and down in a document. Click Scroll Up ( ) to navigate up; click Scroll Down ( ) to navigate down.

Status Bar The status bar displays information about the current state of the program or document.

65

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:41 PM

Page 66

Select a Command from a Pull-Down Menu When you are working in a program, you can use the menu bar to access the program’s commands and features.

Finder

File Ed it View GO Win dow Hel p Back Forward Enclosing Fold er

z[ z] z

ÒzC ÒzH ÒzK

The items in a menu are either commands that execute an action in the program, or features that you can turn on and off.

ÒzA ÒzU

ÒzG zK

Select a Command from a Pull-Down Menu

1

EXECUTE COMMANDS

1 Click the name of the menu that you want to display. l The program displays the menu.

2 Click the command that you want to execute. The program executes the command.

2

If your command appears in a submenu, first click the command that opens the submenu and then click the command that you want to run.

TURN FEATURES ON AND OFF

1 Click the name of the menu that you want to display. l The program displays the menu.

2 Click the menu item. You may have to click for a submenu if your command is not on the main menu. The program turns the feature either on with a check mark ( ) or off (no check mark appears).

66

1 2

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:41 PM

Page 67

Select a Command Using a Toolbar

4

chapter

Learning Mac Basics

You can access commands faster using the toolbar. Most programs come with a toolbar, which is a collection of buttons that gives you one-click access to the program’s most-common features.

Document 1 VORITES TOOLS HELP STOP

REFRESH

HOME

PRINT

SEARCH

FAVORITES

HISTORY

MAIL

EDIT Floor Plans

Floor Plans

Select a Command Using a Toolbar TURN FEATURES ON AND OFF

1

1 Click the toolbar button that represents the feature you want to turn on. l The program turns the feature on and indicates this state by highlighting the toolbar button. l When a feature is turned off, the program does not highlight the button.

EXECUTE COMMANDS

1 Click the toolbar button that

1

2

represents the command that you want.

2 If the button displays a menu, click the command on the menu. l The program executes the command.

67

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:41 PM

Page 68

Select Options with Dialog Box Controls Dialog boxes appear when a program needs you to provide information. For example, when you select the File menu’s Print command to print a document, you use the Print dialog box to specify the number of copies that you want to print. You provide that and other information by accessing various types of dialog box controls.

Command Button Clicking a command button executes the command written on the button face. For example, you can click OK to apply settings that you have chosen in a dialog box, or you can click Cancel to close the dialog box without changing the settings.

Text Box A text box enables you to enter typed text. Use the Del key to delete any existing characters, and then type your text.

List Box A list box displays a list of choices from which you select the item you want. Use the vertical scroll bar to bring the item you want into view, and then click the item to select it.

68

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:41 PM

Page 69

Learning Mac Basics

Pop-Up Menu A pop-up menu displays a list of choices from which you select the item you want. Click menu, and then click the item that you want to select.

4

chapter

to pop up the

Check Box Clicking a check box toggles a program feature on and off. If you are turning on a feature, the check box changes from to ; if you are turning off the feature, the check box changes from to .

Radio Button Clicking a radio button turns on a program feature. Only one radio button in a group can be turned on at a time. When you click a radio button, it changes from to .

69

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:41 PM

Page 70

Save a Document After you create a document and make changes to it, you can save the document to preserve your work. When you work on a document, OS X stores the changes in your computer’s memory, which is erased each time you shut down your computer. Saving the document preserves your changes on your computer’s hard drive. Save a Document

1 Click File. 2 Click Save. In most programs, you can also press + .

1

2

If you have saved the document previously, your changes are now preserved, and you do not need to follow the rest of the steps in this section.

l If this is a new document that you have never saved before, the Save dialog appears.

3 Click in the Save As text box and

3

type the name that you want to use for the document. l To select a different folder in which to store the file, you can click in the Where list and then click the location that you prefer.

4 Click Save. The program saves the file.

70

4

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:41 PM

Page 71

Open a Document

Learning Mac Basics

4

chapter

To work with a document that you have saved in the past, you can open it in the program that you used to create it.

Open a Document

2

1 Start the program that you want to work with.

3

2 Click File. 3 Click Open. In most programs, you can also press + .

l The Open dialog appears. l To select a different folder from which to open the file, you can click in the From list and then click the location that you prefer.

4

4 Click the document. 5 Click Open. The document appears in the program window.

5

71

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:41 PM

Page 72

Print a Document When you need a hard copy of your document, either for your files or to distribute to someone else, you can send the document to your printer.

When in the Course of human events, necessary for one people to dissolve it becomes bands which have connected them the political And to assume among the powers with another, separate and equal station to whichof the earth, the Nature and of Nature’s God entitle the Laws of respect to the opinions of mankind them, a decent they should declare the causes whichrequires that impel them to the separation.

mes beco tical li , it ents e po her, e th an ev ve th ot hum dissol with an earth, of em the nt ws se of to Coure peopleected thwers of h the La, a deceat e th ic them es th n in for on conn e po wh Whe ssary ch have ong thation to entitle requirpel them nece s whi sume amual st s God ankind ich im nd m e’ eq ba to as and of es wh atur and rate d of N inions e caus op sepa ure an the are th Nat ect to ld decl . resp shou paration they the se to

Floonrs Pla

Print a Document

1 Turn on your printer. 2 Open the document that you want to print.

2

3 Click File. 4 Click Print.

3

In many programs, you can select the Print command by pressing + .

4

72

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:41 PM

Page 73

Learning Mac Basics The Print dialog box appears. The layout of the Print dialog box varies from program to program. The version shown here is a typical example.

4

chapter

5

6

5 If you have more than one printer, click in the Printer list to select the printer that you want to use. l To print more than one copy, click to expand the dialog box, and then use the Copies text box to type the number of copies to print.

6 Click Print.

l OS X prints the document. The print icon appears in the Dock while the document prints.

Can I preview my document before I print it? Yes. It is a good idea to preview the document before printing it to ensure that the document layout looks the way you want. To preview the document, follow Steps 1 to 4 in this section to display the Print dialog box. Click Preview to display the document in the Preview window. When you are done, click Preview and then click Quit Preview.

73

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:41 PM

Page 74

Edit Document Text When you work with a character-based file, such as a text or word-processing document or an e-mail message, you need to know the basic techniques for editing, selecting, copying, and moving text.

When in the Course of human events, it becomes necessary for one people to dissolve the political connected them with another, bands whichh have con And to assume among the powers of the earth, the station to which the Laws of te and equal stat separate Nature and of Nature’s God entitle them, a decent respect to the opinions of mankind requires that uld declare the ccauses which impel them they should paration. to the separation.

Edit Document Text DELETE CHARACTERS

1 In a text document, click immediately to the right of the last character that you want to delete. l The cursor appears after the character.

1

2 Press

Del until you have deleted all the characters you want.

If you make a mistake, immediately click Edit, and then click Undo. You can also press + .

2

74

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:41 PM

Page 75

Learning Mac Basics

4

chapter

SELECT TEXT FOR EDITING

1 Click and drag across the text that you want to select.

1

2 Release the mouse button. l The program highlights the selected text.

Are there any shortcut methods for selecting text? Yes, most OS X programs have shortcuts you can use. Here are the most useful ones:

l Double-click a word to select it.

SHORT CUT

l Triple-click inside a paragraph to select it. (In Word, triple-click to select a line, quadruple-click to select a paragraph.)

l Press

+

to select the entire document.

➥

continued

75

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:41 PM

Page 76

Edit Document Text (continued) Once you select text, you can then copy or move the text to another location in your document.

ts, it becomes hum n even se ofofff huma the it becomes events, Whe hhumto disso huma political Course C peop he Cour the lve the Whenn ininn th lehuman ple on ffor political theanot ssaryyy for dthem her, t ddissolve to nece ected lleecte one people oon orr one with necessar t ted cconnecte conn hav have th with another, band ttedd tthem cted ve ccon ave whichh hhave bandss whic h, the earth, the of powers power the And to assume among of Laws which the separate and equal station to whi ent entitl them, a decent Nature and of Nature’ss God entitle that requires r mankind of opinions respect to the im them ses which impel they should declare the causes

Edit Document Text (continued)

2

COPY TEXT

1 Select the text that you want to copy. 2 Click Edit. 3 Click Copy.

3 1

In most programs, you can also press + .

5

4 Click inside the document at the position where you want the copy of the text to appear. The cursor appears in the position where you clicked.

5 Click Edit. 6 Click Paste. In most programs, you can also press + . l The program inserts a copy of the selected text at the cursor position.

76

6 4

PASTE

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:41 PM

Page 77

4

chapter

Learning Mac Basics MOVE TEXT

2

1 Select the text that you want to move. 2 Click Edit. 3 Click Cut.

3

In most programs, you can also press + . The program removes the text from the document.

1

5

4 Click inside the document at the position where you want to move the text. The cursor appears at the position where you clicked.

6

5 Click Edit. 6 Click Paste. In most programs, you can also press + . l The program inserts the text at the cursor position.

4

How do I move and copy text with my mouse? First, select the text that you want to move or copy. To move the selected text, position the mouse pointer over the selection and then click and drag the text to the new position within the document. To copy the selected text, position the mouse pointer over the selection, press and hold the Option key, and then click and drag the text to the new position within the document.

TEXT

77

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:41 PM

Page 78

Copy a File You can make an exact copy of a file. This is useful when you want to make a backup of an important file or if you want to send the copy on a disk to another person.

When in the Course of human events, it becomes necessary for one people to dissolve the political bands which have connected them with another, the And to assume among the powers of the earth,of separate and equal station to which the Laws decent Nature and of Nature’s God entitle them, a that respect to the opinions of mankind requires them impel which causes they should declare the

You can copy either a single file or multiple files. You can also use this technique to copy a folder. Copy a File

1 Locate the file that you want to copy. 2 Open the folder to which you want to

1

3

copy the file. To open a second folder window, click File and then click New Finder Window, or press + .

3 Press and hold the

key, and then click and drag the file and drop it inside the destination folder. Option

l The original file remains in its folder. l A copy of the original file appears in the destination folder. You can also make a copy of a file in the same folder, which is useful if you want to make major changes to the file and you would like to preserve a copy of the original. Click the file, click File, and then click Duplicate, or press + . OS X creates a copy with the word “copy” added to the filename.

78

2

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:41 PM

Page 79

Move a File

Learning Mac Basics

4

chapter

When you need to store a file in a new location, the easiest way is to move the file from its current folder to another folder on your computer. You can use this technique to move a single file, multiple files, and even a folder. Move a File

1 Locate the file that you want to move. 2 Open the folder to which you want to move the file. To create a new destination folder in the current folder, click File and then click New Folder, or press + + .

2

3 Click and drag the file and drop it inside the destination folder.

1

3

l The file disappears from its original folder. l The file moves to the destination folder.

79

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:41 PM

Page 80

Rename a File You can change the name of a file, which is useful if the current filename does not accurately describe the contents of the file. By giving your document a descriptive name, you make it easier to find the file later. You should only rename those documents that you have created or that have been given to you by someone else. Do not rename any of the OS X system files or any files associated with your programs, or your computer may behave erratically, or even crash.

006 2 t e g Bud t 2008 Budge

Rename a File

1 Open the folder containing the file that you want to rename.

2 Click the file. 3 Press . l A text box appears around the filename. You can also rename any folders that you have created.

2 1

4 Edit the existing name or type a new name that you want to use for the file. If you decide that you do not want to rename the file after all, you can press to cancel the operation.

5 Press

or click an empty section of the folder.

l The new name appears under the file icon.

80

4

07_384688-ch04.qxp

9/5/08

9:41 PM

Page 81

Delete a File

Learning Mac Basics

4

chapter

When you no longer need a file, you can delete it. This helps to prevent your hard drive from becoming cluttered with unnecessary files. You should ensure that you delete only those documents that you have created or that have been given to you by someone else. Do not delete any of the OS X system files or any files associated with your programs, or your computer may behave erratically, or even crash. Delete a File

1 Locate the file that you want to delete.

2 Click and drag the file and drop it on the Trash icon in the Dock.

1

2

l The file disappears from the folder. If you delete a file accidentally, you can restore it. Simply click the Dock’s Trash icon to open the Trash window. Click and drag the file from the Trash window and drop it back in its original folder.

81

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:18 PM

Page 82

chapter

5

Playing and Organizing Music Using iTunes, you can create a library of music and use that library to play songs, albums, and collections of songs called playlists, tune in to an Internet radio station, and subscribe to podcasts. You can also use iTunes to listen to music CDs, manage music on an iPod, and purchase music from the online iTunes Store.

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:18 PM

Page 83

Open and Close iTunes ....................................84 Understanding the iTunes Library ..................86 Navigate the iTunes Window ..........................87 Play a Song ..........................................................88 Adjust the Volume ..............................................89 Play a Music CD ..................................................90 Import Tracks from a Music CD ......................94 Create a Playlist ..................................................96 Burn Music Files to a CD ..................................98 Edit Song Information ....................................100 Purchase Music from the iTunes Store ......102 Listen to an Internet Radio Station ............104 Subscribe to a Podcast ..................................106

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:18 PM

Page 84

Open and Close iTunes Your Mac includes iTunes to enable you to play back and manage various types of audio files. To begin using the program, you must first learn how to find and open the iTunes window. When you finish using the program, you can close the iTunes window to free up computer processing power.

OPEN

CLOSED

Open and Close iTunes OPEN ITUNES

1 Click Finder ( ) in the Dock. 2 Click Applications. 3 Double-click iTunes. 2 3

1 The iTunes window appears.

84

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:18 PM

Page 85

Playing and Organizing Music

5

chapter

1

CLOSE ITUNES

1 Click iTunes.

2 Click Quit iTunes.

2

Are there faster methods I can use to open iTunes? The fastest way to start iTunes is to click the iTunes icon ( ) in the Dock. If you have used iTunes recently, another reasonably fast method is to click the Apple icon ( ), click Recent Items, and then click iTunes.

SHORTT CU

Are there faster methods I can use to close iTunes?

OPEN

SHORTT CU

Probably the fastest method you can use to quit iTunes is to click Close ( ). Alternatively, +click or right-click and then click Quit. Finally, if your hands are closer to the keyboard than to the mouse, you can quit iTunes by pressing + .

CLOSED

85

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:18 PM

Page 86

Understanding the iTunes Library COINS

iTunes “Lonely Rain”

Most of your iTunes time will be spent in the Library, so you need to understand what you are working with.

“This Shouldn’t Be Love”

Chris John

Ronda Day

“The First 7 Lies”

“Morning Light”

Stone Cold Soul

Elle Macafee

“Maybe Tomorrow”

“Did You Miss Me?”

Jake Thomas

Carolyn Craig

“First Love”

“Choose Love”

Craig Marks

Indy Man

A B C D E F G H

I

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8

9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8

0 9 10

A B C D E F G H

The iTunes Library The iTunes Library is where your Mac stores the files that you can play and work with in the iTunes application. The iTunes Library includes not only the audio features discussed in this chapter, but also movies, TV shows, and games. Each section of the Library shows you the contents of that section and the details for each item, such as the name of each song and the artist who recorded it.

iTunes Library Movies T V S ho w s Music Games

86

I

J

J

Audio in the Library Although iTunes has some video components, its focus is on audio features, so most of the Library sections are audio related. These sections include Music, Podcasts, Audiobooks, and Radio. If you connect an iPhone to your Mac, your iTunes Library also includes a Ringtones section for music-based ringtones.

Audiobooks Radio Music Podcasts

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:18 PM

Page 87

Navigate the iTunes Window

Playing and Organizing Music

5

chapter

Familiarizing yourself with the various elements of the iTunes window is a good idea so that you can easily navigate and activate elements when you are ready to play audio files, podcasts, or listen to Internet radio.

Playback Controls These buttons control media playback, and enable you to make adjustments to the volume.

Status Area This area displays information about the item that is currently playing or the action that iTunes is currently performing.

View Options You use these buttons to control how the contents of the current category appear.

Contents The contents of the current iTunes Library category appear here.

Categories This area displays the iTunes Library categories that you can view.

Now Playing This area shows a visual display of the currently playing item, usually the album art.

87

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:18 PM

Page 88

Play a Song You use the Music category of the iTunes Library to play a song that is stored on your computer. If you need to leave the room or take a call, you can also pause the currently playing song.

Play a Song

3

1 Click Music. 2 Click the song you want to play. 3 Click the Play button ( ).

1

2

iTunes begins playing the song. l Information about the song playback appears here. l iTunes displays a speaker icon ( ) beside the currently playing song. l If you need to stop the song temporarily, click the Pause button ( ). Note: You can also pause and restart a song by pressing the . Note: See the “Play a Music CD” section to learn more about the playback buttons.

88

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:18 PM

Page 89

Adjust the Volume

Playing and Organizing Music

5

chapter

You can adjust the volume in iTunes up or down to get the audio just right. You can also mute the playback to turn off the volume.

Adjust the Volume TURN VOLUME UP OR DOWN

1

1 Click and drag the Volume slider left (to reduce the volume) or right (to increase the volume).

1

Note: To reduce the volume, you can also press + ; to increase the volume, you can also press + . MUTE THE VOLUME

1 Click Controls. 2 Click Mute. Note: To mute the volume, you can also press Option + + .

2

Note: To restore the volume, either click Control and then Mute, or adjust the Volume slider.

89

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:18 PM

Page 90

Play a Music CD You can play your favorite music CDs in iTunes. The CD appears in the Devices section and it displays the individual tracks on the CD. During playback, you can skip tracks and pause and resume play.

Play a Music CD PLAY A CD

1 Insert a music CD into your Mac’s CD or DVD drive. l The music CD appears in iTune’s Devices category. l iTunes shows the contents of the CD.

2 Click

.

iTunes begins playing the CD from the first track.

90

2

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:19 PM

Page 91

Playing and Organizing Music SKIP A TRACK

5

chapter

3

3 Click the Next button ( ) to skip to the next track. Note: You can also skip to the next track by pressing + .

4

4 Click the Previous button ( ) to skip to the beginning of the current track; click again to skip to the previous track. Note: You can also skip to the previous track by pressing + .

PAUSE AND RESUME PLAY

5 Click

(

changes to

5 ).

iTunes pauses playback.

6 Click

.

iTunes resumes playback where you left off.

Can I change the CD’s audio levels?

Can I display visualizations during playback?

Yes, iTunes has a graphic equalizer component that you can use to adjust the levels. To display the equalizer, click View and then click Show Equalizer. In the Equalizer window, use the sliders to set the audio levels, or click the drop-down list ( to choose an audio preset.

Yes. You can click View and then click Turn On Visualizer (you can also + ). To change press the currently displayed visualizer, click View, click Visualizer, and then click the visualization you want to view.

)

➥

continued

91

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:19 PM

Page 92

Play a Music CD (continued) iTunes gives you more options for controlling the CD playback. For example, you can switch to another song, set the CD to repeat, and play the tracks randomly. When the CD is done, you can use iTunes to eject it from your Mac.

Play a Music CD (continued) PLAY ANOTHER SONG

7 In the list of songs, double-click the song you want to play. iTunes begins playing the song.

7

REPEAT THE CD

8 Click the Repeat button (

changes to

).

iTunes restarts the CD after the last track finishes playing. To repeat just the current song, click again ( changes to ).

8

92

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:19 PM

Page 93

Playing and Organizing Music

5

chapter

PLAY SONGS RANDOMLY

9 Click the Shuffle button (

changes to

).

iTunes shuffles the order of play.

9 EJECT THE CD

0 Click the Eject button ( ) beside the CD. l You can also click the Eject button ( ) in the lower-right corner of the iTunes window.

0

Note: You can also eject the CD by pressing and holding the Eject key on the keyboard.

iTunes ejects the CD from your Mac’s CD or DVD drive.

Why do I not see the song titles after I insert my music CD? When you play a music CD, iTunes tries to gather information about the album from the CD itself. If that does not work, iTunes tries to get the album data from the Internet. If you still see only track numbers, it may be that you do not have an Internet connection established. Connect to the Internet, click Advanced, and then click Get CD Track Names.

93

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:19 PM

Page 94

Import Tracks from a Music CD You can add tracks from a music CD to the iTunes Library. This enables you to listen to an album without having to put the CD into your Mac’s CD or DVD drive each time. The process of adding tracks from a CD is called importing, or ripping, in Mac OS X. After you import the tracks from a music CD, you can play those tracks from the Music category of the iTunes Library. Import Tracks from a Music CD

1 Insert a CD into your Mac’s CD or DVD drive. l The music CD appears in iTune’s Devices category. l iTunes shows the contents of the CD.

2 Click the check box so it is unchecked next to each CD track that you do not want to copy ( changes to ).

3 Click Import CD.

2

3

94

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:19 PM

Page 95

Playing and Organizing Music

5

chapter

iTunes begins importing the track or tracks. l This area displays the copy progress for each track. l When iTunes is importing a track, it displays beside the track number. l When iTunes is finished importing a track, it displays beside the track number.

l When iTunes has completed the import, you see beside the track numbers of all the tracks you selected.

96

32

48

64 Yes. You do that by changing the bit rate, which is a measure of how much of the CD’s original data gets copied to your computer. This is measured in kilobits per second (Kbps): the higher the value the higher the quality, but the more disk space each track takes up. Click iTunes, click Preferences, click Advanced, and then click Importing. In the Setting list, click , click Custom, and then use the Stereo Bit Rate list to click the value you want. ARPNESS

Click the Music category, scroll down until you see the album you imported, +click or right-click the track that you want to remove, and then click Delete from the pop-up menu. When iTunes asks you to confirm the deletion, click Remove. When iTunes asks if you want to keep the file, click Move to Trash.

Can I adjust the quality of the copies?

SH

I ripped a track by accident. How do I remove it from the Library?

95

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:19 PM

Page 96

Create a Playlist A playlist is a collection of songs that are related in some way. Using your iTunes Library, you can create customized playlists that include only the songs that you want to hear.

Create a Playlist

1

CREATE THE PLAYLIST

1 Click File. 2 Click New Playlist. Note: You can also choose the New Playlist command by pressing + .

iTunes creates a new playlist.

3 Type a name for the new playlist. 4 Press .

3

96

4

2

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:19 PM

Page 97

Playing and Organizing Music

5

chapter

ADD SONGS TO THE PLAYLIST

1 Click Music. 2 +click or right-click a song

1

that you want to add to the new playlist.

2

3 Click Add to Playlist. 4 Click the playlist you just created. 5 Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to add more

3

songs to the playlist.

4

6 Click the playlist. l iTunes displays the songs you added to the playlist. l If you want to listen to the playlist, you can click .

6

Is there a faster way to create and populate a playlist? Yes. First, click Music to open the Music category of the iTunes Library. Press and hold the key and then click each song that you want to include in your playlist. When you are done, click File and then click New Playlist from Selection. (You can also press Option + + .) Type the new playlist name and then press .

Is there any way to make iTunes add songs to a playlist automatically? Yes, you can create a smart playlist

sts

Smart Playli

1: Artist e 2: Song Titl

Title 3: Album 4: Genre 5: Personal

where the songs that appear in the list have one or more properties in common, such as the genre, rating, artist, or text in the song title. Click File and then click New Smart Playlist (you can also press Option + + ). Use the Smart Playlist dialog box to create one or more rules that define which songs you want to appear in the playlist.

97

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:19 PM

Page 98

Burn Music Files to a CD You can copy, or burn, music files from your Mac onto a CD. Burning CDs is a great way to create customized CDs that you can listen to on the computer or in a portable device. You can burn music files from within the iTunes window. To burn music files to a CD, your Mac must have a recordable CD or DVD drive. Burn Music Files to a CD

1 Insert a blank CD into your Mac’s recordable disc drive.

2 If you already have iTunes running and your Mac asks you to choose an action, click Ignore.

2

l If you do not yet have iTunes running, use the Action menu to click , click Open iTunes, and then click OK.

3 Create a playlist for the songs you want to burn to the disc. Note: See the section “Create a Playlist” to learn how to build an iTunes playlist.

4 Click the playlist that you want to burn.

98

4

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:19 PM

Page 99

Playing and Organizing Music

5

chapter

5 Click the heading of the play order column to ensure the songs are sorted in the order they will play on the disc.

5

6 To modify the play order, click and drag a song and drop it on a new position in the playlist.

6

7 Repeat Step 6 to get the songs in the order that you want them to appear on the CD. l To arrange the songs randomly, click iTunes Shuffle ( ).

8 Click File. 9 Click Burn Playlist to Disc.

8

l You can also click the Burn Disc button. iTunes burns the songs to the CD.

9

Can I control the interval between songs on the CD?

What happens if I have more music than can fit on a single disc?

Yes. By default, iTunes adds 2 seconds between each track on the CD. To change that, click iTunes, click Preferences, click Advanced, and then click Burning. In the Gap Between Songs pop-up menu, click , and then click the interval you want to use. Click OK.

You can still add all the music you want to burn to the playlist. iTunes fills the first disc and then adds the remaining songs to a second disc. After iTunes finishes burning the first disc, it prompts you to insert the next one.

99

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:19 PM

Page 100

Edit Song Information

Long Road Home Stone Cold Soul Details Devil in the Barn

For each song in your Library or a music CD, iTunes maintains a collection of information that includes the song title, artist, album title, genre, and more. If there are errors or omissions in a song’s information, you can edit the data.

Rock New Act Records 2008

You can edit one song at a time, or you can edit multiple songs, such as an entire music CD. Edit Song Information

2

EDIT A SINGLE SONG

1 Click the song you want to edit. 2 Click File. 3 Click Get Info. Note: You can also press + . Alternatively, +click or right-click the song and then click Get Info.

3

1

4 Click Info. 5 Edit or add information to the

4

fields. l If you want to edit a nearby song, click Previous or Next to display the song you want.

5

6 Click OK.

6

100

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:19 PM

Page 101

Playing and Organizing Music EDIT MULTIPLE SONGS

5

chapter

2

1 Select all the songs that you want to edit. Note: To select individual songs, press and hold and click each song; to select all songs (on a music CD, for example), press + .

3

2 Click File. 3 Click Get Info.

1

Note: You can also press + . Alternatively, +click or right-click any selected song and then click Get Info.

iTunes asks you to confirm that you want to edit multiple songs.

4 Click Yes. The Multiple Item Information dialog box appears.

5 Edit or add information to the fields. l iTunes displays modified field.

beside each

4

6 Click OK.

5

iTunes applies the edits to each selected song.

6

When I edit multiple songs, why do I not see all the fields in the Multiple Item Information dialog box? When you are editing multiple songs, you can only modify fields that contain data that is common to all the songs. This makes sense because any changes you make apply to all the selected songs. For example, each song has a different title, so you would not want to give every song the same title. This is why you do not see the Name field in the Multiple Item Information dialog box. However, you do see fields that are common to all the selected songs. On a music CD, for example, data such as the artist, album title, and genre are usually the same for all the songs.

101

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:19 PM

Page 102

Purchase Music from the iTunes Store You can add music to your iTunes Library by purchasing it from the iTunes Store. iTunes downloads the song or album to your computer and then adds it to both the Music section and the Purchased section. To purchase music from the iTunes Store, you must have an Apple account. This can either be an account on the Apple Store site or a MobileMe account. You can also use an AOL account, if you have one. Purchase Music from the iTunes Store

1 Click iTunes Store. 2 Click Music.

1

2

The iTunes Store appears.

3 Locate the music you want to purchase.

4 Click Buy Album. l If you just want to purchase a song, click Buy Song instead.

102

3 4

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:19 PM

Page 103

Playing and Organizing Music

5

chapter

iTunes asks you to confirm the purchase.

5 Click Buy. 5 iTunes charges your credit card and begins downloading the music to your Mac. l To watch the progress of the download, click Downloads.

When the download is complete, iTunes asks if you want to back up your purchased music.

6 Click Not Now. l If you prefer to back up your purchase now, click Back Up Purchases and then follow the instructions that appear.

Can I use my purchased music on other computers and devices? Yes, with some restrictions. You can play most songs on up to five computers, on your iPod, through Apple TV, or burned to an audio CD. These restrictions are part of the digital rights management (DRM) applied to most songs. The iTunes Plus sections of the store offer some DRM-free songs that usually cost more, but do not have these restrictions.

6

If I want to purchase a number of songs, how do I avoid having many $0.99 charges on my credit card bill? 99¢ You can switch your iTunes Store preferences to use a shopping cart instead of the default 1-Click purchasing. Click iTunes, click Preferences, click Store, click Buy using a Shopping Cart ( changes to ), and then click OK. When shopping, you now click Add Album (or Add Song) to add music to your shopping cart. When you are done, click Shopping Cart in iTunes, and then click Buy Now.

103

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:19 PM

Page 104

Listen to an Internet Radio Station The Internet offers a number of radio stations that you can listen to. iTunes maintains a list of many of these online radio stations, so it is often easier to use iTunes to listen to Internet radio. Just like a regular radio station, an Internet radio station broadcasts a constant audio stream, except you access the audio over the Internet instead of over the air.

Listen to an Internet Radio Station

1 Click Radio.

1

iTunes displays a list of radio genres.

2 Click

to open the genre you want to work with ( changes to ).

104

2

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:19 PM

Page 105

Playing and Organizing Music iTunes displays a list of radio station streams in the genre.

5

chapter

4

3 Click the radio station stream you want to listen to.

4 Click

3

.

iTunes plays the radio station stream. l The name of the station and the name of the currently playing track usually appear here.

Is it possible to save or record a song from a radio station stream? No, an Internet radio stream is “listen-only.” iTunes does not give you any way to save the stream to your Mac hard disk or to record the stream as it plays.

In the Radio section of the iTunes Library, what does the Bit Rate column refer to? The bit rate is measured in kilobits per second (Kbps) and is the rate at which the Internet radio station broadcasts the stream. The higher the rate, the better the music quality, but higher rates also require a fast Internet connection. Some stations offer multiple bit rates, so if a stream is choppy or distorted, try listening to a lower bit rate stream.

105

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:19 PM

Page 106

Subscribe to a Podcast A podcast is an audio feed — or sometimes a feed that combines both audio and video — that a publisher updates regularly with new episodes. The easiest way to get each episode is to subscribe to the podcast. This ensures that iTunes automatically downloads each new episode to your iTunes Library. You can subscribe to podcasts either directly via the publisher’s Web site, or via the iTunes Store. Subscribe to a Podcast SUBSCRIBE TO A PODCAST ON THE WEB

1 Use your Web browser to navigate to the podcast’s home page.

2 Click the Subscribe in iTunes link. Note: In some cases, the link is called Add to iTunes or simply iTunes.

l iTunes begins downloading the available episodes. l The podcast subscription appears in the Library’s Podcasts category.

106

2

08_384688-ch05.qxp

9/5/08

9:19 PM

Page 107

Playing and Organizing Music

5

chapter

SUBSCRIBE TO A PODCAST USING THE ITUNES STORE

1 Click iTunes Store. 2 Click Podcasts. 1 2

3 Locate the podcast you want to subscribe to.

4 Click Subscribe. l If you just want to listen to one episode before subscribing, click Get Episode instead.

4

iTunes asks you to confirm.

5 Click Subscribe. iTunes adds the subscription to the Podcasts category of the Library.

5

What do I do if the podcast Web site does not have an iTunes link? In this case, you can subscribe to the podcast by telling iTunes the address of the podcast’s feed. Follow these steps:

1 2 3

On the podcast Web site, copy the address of the podcast feed. In iTunes, click Advanced. Click Subscribe to Podcast.

2 3

The Subscribe to Podcast dialog appears.

4

Use the URL text box to paste (or type) the address of the podcast feed.

5

Click OK.

iTunes downloads the available episodes and adds the subscription to the Podcasts category of the Library.

4 5

107

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:08 PM

Page 108

chapter

6

Viewing and Editing Your Photos

PHOTO

SHOP

DIGITA L REPAIRIMAGE KIT

Whether you just want to look at your photos, or you want to edit your photos to crop out unneeded portions or fix problems, your Mac comes with a number of useful tools for working with your photos.

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:08 PM

Page 109

View a Preview of a Photo ............................110 View a Slideshow of Your Photos ................112 Open and Close iPhoto ..................................114 Import Photos from a Digital Camera ........116 View Your Photos..............................................118 Create an Album ..............................................120 Crop a Photo......................................................122 Rotate a Photo ..................................................124 Straighten a Photo ..........................................126 Remove Red-Eye from a Photo ....................128 Enhance a Photo with an Effect ..................130 E-mail a Photo ..................................................132 Take Your Picture ..............................................134 Create a DVD of Your Photos ........................136

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:08 PM

Page 110

View a Preview of a Photo You can preview any saved image file using views such as Columns or Cover Flow in the Pictures folder. You can also preview photos using the Preview application. To use Cover Flow to preview a photo, you must have Mac OS X 10.5 (Leopard) or later. View a Preview of a Photo

5

VIEW A PREVIEW IN FINDER

1 Click Finder ( ) in the Dock. 2 Click Pictures. 3 Click the folder that contains the photo you want to preview.

3

4 Click the photo. 5 Click Columns. l Finder displays a preview of the photo.

4 2 1 5

VIEW A PREVIEW WITH COVER FLOW

3

1 Click in the Dock. 2 Click Pictures. 3 Click the folder that contains the photo you want to preview.

4 Click the photo. 5 Click Cover Flow.

2

l Finder displays a preview of the photo. l Use the scroll bar to scroll through the other photos in the folder.

110

4 1

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:08 PM

Page 111

Viewing and Editing Your Photos VIEW A PREVIEW IN THE PREVIEW APPLICATION

6

chapter

3

1 Click in the Dock. 2 Click Pictures. 3 Open the folder that contains the photo you want to preview.

4 Double-click the photo.

4

2 1 The Preview application opens and displays the photo.

7

5 Click View. 6 Use the View menu commands to

5

6

change how the photo appears in the Preview window. For example, click Zoom In to get a closer look at the photo.

7 When you are finished viewing the photo, click Close (

).

Is there an easier way to preview multiple photos using the Preview application?

Is there a way that I can zoom in on just a portion of a photo?

Yes. Instead of constantly starting and quitting Preview for each photo you want to view, you can load multiple photos into the Preview application. In Finder, navigate to the folder that contains the photos, and then select each file that you want to preview. Either click and drag the mouse ( ) over the photos or press and hold and click each one. In Preview, click Next and Previous to navigate the photos.

Yes. Click Tools and then click Select Tool (or either press + or click Select in the toolbar). Click and drag your mouse to select the portion of the photo that you want to magnify. Click View and then +*). click Zoom to Selection (or press

111

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:08 PM

Page 112

View a Slideshow of Your Photos You can easily view multiple photos by running them in a slideshow using the Preview application. The slideshow displays the images full-screen, and Preview automatically displays the next photo after a few seconds.

View a Slideshow of Your Photos

5

1 Click in the Dock. 2 Click Pictures. 3 Open the folder that contains the

3 6

photos you want to view in the slideshow.

4 Select the photos you want to view.

5 Click File. 6 Click Open.

2 4

1 The Preview application appears.

8

l The images you selected appear in the sidebar.

7 To adjust the order of the photos, click and drag images in the sidebar.

8 Click Slideshow. 7

112

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:08 PM

Page 113

Viewing and Editing Your Photos

6

chapter

Preview begins the slideshow.

9 Move the mouse . l Preview displays the slideshow controls. l Click Next to move to the next photo. l Click Back to move to the previous photo. l Click Pause to suspend the slideshow.

0 When the slideshow is over or when you want to return to Preview, click Close.

0

Is it possible to jump to a specific photo during the slideshow?

What keyboard shortcuts can I use when viewing a slideshow?

Yes, by using the Index Sheet feature. In the slideshow controls, click the Index Sheet button. Preview displays thumbnail views of all the slideshow images. Click the photo that you want to view in the slideshow.

Press to display the next photo, and press to display the previous photo. Press to pause the slideshow, and press to resume. Press to end the slideshow. Press to view the Index Sheet, use the arrow keys to select a photo, and then press to view it.

113

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:08 PM

Page 114

Open and Close iPhoto Your Mac includes iPhoto to enable you to import photos from a digital camera, view photos, and edit and repair photos. To begin using the program, you must first learn how to find and open the iPhoto window. When you finish using the program, you can close the iPhoto window to free up computer-processing power.

CLOSE E

Open and Close iPhoto OPEN IPHOTO

1 Click in the Dock. 2 Click Applications. 3 Double-click iPhoto. 2 3

1 The iPhoto window appears.

114

OPEN

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 115

Viewing and Editing Your Photos CLOSE IPHOTO

6

chapter

1

1 Click iPhoto.

2 Click Quit iPhoto.

2

Are there faster methods I can use to open iPhoto? The fastest way to start iPhoto is to click the iPhoto icon ( ) in the Dock. If you have used iPhoto recently, another reasonably fast method is to click , click Recent Items, and then click iPhoto.

click

Are there faster methods I can use to close iPhoto? Probably the fastest method you can use to quit iPhoto is to click . Alternatively, +click or right-click and then click Quit. Finally, if your hands are closer to the keyboard than to the mouse, you can quit iPhoto by pressing + .

T SHORT CU

Q

115

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 116

Import Photos from a Digital Camera You can import photos from a digital camera and save them on your Mac. In most cases, your Mac uses the iPhoto application to handle importing photos.

See Chapter 3 to learn how to connect a digital camera to your Mac.

Import Photos from a Digital Camera IMPORT PHOTOS FROM A DIGITAL CAMERA

1 Connect your digital camera to your Mac. Your Mac launches the iPhoto application. l Your digital camera appears in the iPhoto Devices section. l iPhoto displays previews of the camera photos.

2 Use the Event Name text box to type a name for the group of photos you are going to import.

3 Use the Description text box to type a description of the photos you are going to import.

2

116

3

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 117

Viewing and Editing Your Photos

6

chapter

4 Select the photos that you want to import. Note: To select photos, either click and drag the mouse ( ) around the photos you want, or press and hold and click each photo.

4

5 Click Import Selected. l If you want to import all the photos from the digital camera, click Import All instead. iPhoto imports the photos from the digital camera.

5

iPhoto asks if you want to delete the original photos from the digital camera.

6 If you no longer need the photos on the camera, click Delete Originals.

6 1

l If you prefer to keep the photos on the camera, click Keep Originals instead.

2

VIEW THE IMPORTED PHOTOS

1 Click Events. 2 Double-click the event name that you specified in Step 2 on the previous page.

When I connect my digital camera, why do I see Image Capture instead of iPhoto? You need to configure Image Capture to open iPhoto when you connect your camera. Follow these steps:

1 2 3 4

Click

in the Dock and click Applications.

3 3

Double-click Image Capture. The Image Capture application opens. Click Image Capture in the menu bar and click Preferences. In the When a camera is connected, open list, click then click Close ( ).

, click iPhoto,

117

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 118

View Your Photos If you want to look at several photos, you can use iPhoto’s full-screen mode to navigate backward and forward through the photos in a folder.

View Your Photos

1 In iPhoto, click Photos. 2 Click beside the folder that

1

contains the photos you want to view ( changes to ).

2

3 Click the first photo you want to view.

4 Click Enter full screen ( ).

3

4

118

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 119

Viewing and Editing Your Photos

6

chapter

iPhoto displays the photo in fullscreen mode.

5 Move the mouse ( ) to the bottom of the screen. iPhoto displays the full-screen controls.

6 Click Next ( ) to view the next photo in the folder.

6

l You can also click Previous ( ) to see the previous photo in the folder.

5

Note: You can also navigate photos by pressing and .

7 When you are done, move the mouse to the bottom of the screen.

8 Click Exit ( ).

8 7

Is there a way that I can jump quickly to a particular photo in full-screen mode?

3 2

Yes. Follow these steps:

1

Move the mouse of the screen.

to the top

l iPhoto displays thumbnail images of the folder’s photos.

2 3

Use the horizontal scroll bar to bring the thumbnail of the photo you want into view. Click the photo’s thumbnail. iPhoto displays the photo in full-screen mode.

119

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 120

Create an Album An album is a collection of photos that are related in some way. Using your iPhoto Library, you can create customized albums that include only the photos that you want to view.

Create an Album CREATE AN ALBUM

1 2

1 Click File. 2 Click New Album. Note: You can also choose the New Album command by pressing + .

3 Type a name for the new album. 4 Click Create. 3 4

120

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 121

Viewing and Editing Your Photos ADD PHOTOS TO THE ALBUM

1 Click Photos. 2 Click beside the folder that

6

chapter

2 1

contains the photos you want to work with ( changes to ).

3 Click and drag a photo and drop it on the new album.

3

4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to add other photos to the album.

5 Click the album. l iPhoto displays the photos you added to the album.

5

Is there a faster way to create and populate an album? Yes. First, click Photos to open the Photos section of the iPhoto Library, and then open the folder you want to work with. Press and hold the key and then click each photo that you want to include in your album. When you are done, click File and then click New Album from + + .) Selection. (You can also press Type the new album name and then click Create.

Is there any way to make iPhoto add photos to an album automatically? Yes, you can create a smart album where the photos that appear in the album have one or more properties in common, such as the description, rating, date, or text in the photo title. Click File and then click New Smart Album (you can also press Option + + ). Use the Smart Album dialog box to create one or more rules that define which photos you want to appear in the album.

121

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 122

Crop a Photo If you have a photo containing elements that you do not want or need to see, you can often cut out those elements. This is called cropping, and it can help give focus to the true subject of a photo. When you crop a photo, you specify a rectangular area of the photo that you want to keep. iPhoto discards everything outside of the rectangle. Crop a Photo

1 Click the photo you want to crop. 2 Click Edit.

1

2 iPhoto displays its editing tools.

3 Click Crop ( ).

3

122

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 123

Viewing and Editing Your Photos

6

chapter

iPhoto displays a cropping rectangle on the photo.

4 Click and drag a corner or side to define the area you want to keep. Note: Remember that iPhoto keeps the area inside the rectangle.

4

5 Click Apply.

5

iPhoto saves the cropped photo.

6 Click Done. iPhoto exits Edit mode.

6

Is there a quick way to crop a photo to a certain size? Yes, iPhoto enables you to specify either a specific size, such as 640 x 480, or a specific ratio, such as 4 x 3 or 16 x 9. Follow these steps:

1 2 3 4

Follow Steps 1 to 3 to display the Crop tool. In the Constrain list, click

.

Click the size or ratio you want to use. Click Apply.

4 3

123

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 124

Rotate a Photo If you have a photo that shows the subject sideways or upside down, you can use iPhoto to rotate the photo so that the subject appears right-side up. You can rotate a photo either clockwise or counterclockwise.

Rotate a Photo

1 Click the photo you want to rotate.

2 Click Edit.

1

2 iPhoto displays its editing tools.

3 Click Rotate ( ).

3

124

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 125

Viewing and Editing Your Photos

6

chapter

l iPhoto rotates the photo 90 degrees counterclockwise.

4 Repeat Step 3 until the subject of the photo is right-side up.

5 Click Done. iPhoto exits Edit mode.

5

Can I rotate a photo clockwise, instead? Yes, you can. Press and hold the Option key and the Rotate icon changes from to . With Option held down, click Rotate to rotate the photo clockwise by 90 degrees. Note, too, that you can also +click or right-click the photo and then click Rotate Clockwise.

125

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 126

Straighten a Photo If you have a photo that is not quite level, you can use iPhoto to nudge the photo clockwise or counterclockwise so that the subject appears straight.

Straighten a Photo

1 Click the photo you want to straighten.

2 Click Edit.

1

2 iPhoto displays its editing tools.

3 Click Straighten ( ).

3

126

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 127

Viewing and Editing Your Photos

6

chapter

iPhoto displays a grid over the photo.

4 Click Decrease Angle ( ) to nudge the photo 0.1 degrees counterclockwise. l You can also click Increase Angle ( ) to nudge the photo 0.1 degrees clockwise.

4

5 Click Done. iPhoto exits Edit mode.

5

How do I know when my photo is level? Use the gridlines that iPhoto places over the photo. Locate a horizontal line in your photo, and then rotate the photo so that this line is parallel to the nearest horizontal line in the grid. You can also match a vertical line in the photo with a vertical line in the grid.

127

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 128

Remove Red-Eye from a Photo

AFTER

If you have a photo where one or more people or animals have red eyes due to the camera flash, you can use iPhoto to remove the red eye and give your subjects a more natural look.

Remove Red Eye from a Photo

1 Click the photo that contains the red eye.

2 Click Edit. 1

2

iPhoto displays its editing tools.

3 Click Red-Eye ( ).

3

128

BEFORE

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 129

6

chapter

Viewing and Editing Your Photos iPhoto displays its Red-Eye controls. l If needed, you can click and drag this slider to the right to zoom in on the picture.

4

4 Click the red eye in the photo.

l iPhoto removes the red eye.

5

5

5 Repeat Step 4 to fix any other instances of red eye in the photo.

6 Click

(or click Red-Eye tool.

5

) to exit the

6

7 Click Done.

7

iPhoto exits Edit mode.

Why does iPhoto not remove the red eye in my photo when I click it with the Red-Eye tool? The red eye may not be “red” enough for iPhoto to automatically fix it. To work around this problem, you can use the manual version of the Red-Eye tool. Follow these steps:

1

Follow Steps 1 to 3 to display the Red-Eye controls.

2

In the Size list, click click Manual.

3

Click and drag the slider until the displayed circle is the size of the red-eye area.

4

Use your mouse to move the circle over the red eye and then click.

4

and then

2

3

iPhoto removes the red eye that occurs within the circle.

129

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 130

Enhance a Photo with an Effect You can give a photo a more interesting look by applying an effect to the photo. iPhoto offers several different effects, including black and white or sepia coloring, fading or boosting the color, and edge blurring. SEPIA EFFECT

Enhance a Photo with an Effect

1 Click the photo that you want to enhance.

2 Click Edit.

1

2 iPhoto displays its editing tools.

3 Click Effects ( ).

3

130

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 131

Viewing and Editing Your Photos

6

chapter

iPhoto displays the Effects palette.

4 Click the effect you want to apply.

4

l iPhoto applies the effect.

5 If the effect offers a numeric value, click the arrow buttons to set the value you prefer.

7

6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to apply other effects to the photo.

7 Click

(or click Effects tool.

) to exit the

5

8 Click Done. 8

iPhoto exits Edit mode.

How do I remove an effect? If it is an effect such as Sepia or Antique that does not have an associated numeric value, click the effect again to turn it off. For an effect that has a numeric value, reduce the value to 0. If you have already applied one or more effects, right-click the photo and then click Revert to Original.

I just want my photo to look better. Is there an easy way to do that?

REVERSE EFFECT

Yes, there is. iPhoto comes with an Enhance tool that adjusts several photo elements to optimum values, including exposure, contrast, color saturation, and tint. Click the photo, click Edit, and then click Enhance ( ). If you are an experienced photographer, you can enhance the photo by hand by clicking Adjust ( ).

131

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:09 PM

Page 132

E-mail a Photo If you have a photo that you want to share with someone, and you know that person’s e-mail address, you can use iPhoto to send the photo in an e-mail message. Even if a photo is very large, you can still send it via e-mail because you can use iPhoto to shrink the copy of the photo that appears in the message. E-mail a Photo

1 Click the photo you want to send. 1

2 Click Share. 3 Click Email. l You can also click Email ( ).

132

2

3

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:10 PM

Page 133

Viewing and Editing Your Photos The Mail Photo dialog box appears.

6

chapter

4

4 In the Size list, click

and then click the size you want to use for the sent photo.

5 Click Compose.

5

iPhoto creates a new Apple Mail message.

8 6

l The photo appears in the message body.

7

6 Use the To text box to type the address of the message recipient.

7 Use the Subject text box to type the message subject.

8 Click Send. Apple Mail sends the message.

How do I insert some text above the photo? Inserting a bit of text above the photo is a good idea because it enables you to introduce the photo and let the recipient know why you are sending it. To add the text, follow these steps:

1

Click inside the narrow white area to the left of the photo.

4

Apple Mail displays a large, blinking cursor to the left of the photo.

2 3

Press Press

. .

1

The cursor moves into the new line you created.

4

Type your message above the photo.

133

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:10 PM

Page 134

Take Your Picture If your Mac comes with a built-in iSight camera, or if you have a third-party camera attached to your Mac, you can use the camera to take a picture of yourself using the Photo Booth application. Once you have taken your picture, you can e-mail that picture, add it to iPhoto, or set is as your user account or iChat buddy picture. Take Your Picture TAKE YOUR PICTURE WITH PHOTO BOOTH

1 In the Dock, click . 2 Click Applications. 3 Double-click Photo Booth. l You can also click the Dock’s Photo Booth icon ( ).

3 2

1 The Photo Booth window appears. l The live feed from the camera appears here.

4 Click Take a still picture ( ). l Click Take four quick pictures ( ) if you want Photo Booth to snap four successive photos, each about 1 second apart. l Click Take a movie clip ( ) if you want Photo Booth to capture the live camera feed as a movie.

4

134

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:10 PM

Page 135

Viewing and Editing Your Photos

6

chapter

5 Click Take Photo ( ). Note: You can also press Take Photo.

+

or click File and then click

Photo Booth counts down 3 seconds and then takes the photo. Note: When the Mac is taking your picture, be sure to look into the camera, not into the screen.

5 WORK WITH YOUR PHOTO BOOTH PICTURE

l Photo Booth displays the picture.

1 Click the taken picture. l Click Email ( ) to send the photo in an e-mail message. l Click iPhoto (

) to add the photo to iPhoto.

l Click Account Picture ( ) to set the photo as your user account picture. l Click Buddy Picture ( ) to set the photo as your iChat buddy picture.

1

Is there some way to make my photos more interesting? Definitely. Photo Booth comes with around two dozen special effects that can make your photo look like an X-ray or comic book, apply distortions such as a mirror image, add a background image, and more. 3 Follow these steps:

1 2

In Photo Booth, click Effects. Click an icon to select a different page of effects.

l You can also use the arrow buttons to change pages.

3

Click the effect you want to use.

1 2

135

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:10 PM

Page 136

Create a DVD of Your Photos You can create a slideshow of photos and burn it to a recordable DVD disc for playback on your Mac or on your home or portable DVD player. After you start the slideshow, the feature automatically advances and displays each photo on the disc as a slide.

Create a DVD of Your Photos

2

1 In iPhoto, select the photos that you want to add to the DVD.

2 Click Share. 3 Click Send to iDVD.

iDVD loads, starts a new project, and populates the project with the photos.

4 Click Themes. 5 Click the theme you want to use. 6 Double-click the menu title.

1

3

5

6

4

136

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:10 PM

Page 137

Viewing and Editing Your Photos

6

chapter

7 Use the pop-up menus to set the title font.

8 Type a new title and then press

.

8 7

9 Click Media. 0 Click Photos. ! Click and drag a photo and drop

0

it on the theme’s Drop Zone 1.

!

How do I remove the Apple logo from the main menu? Follow these steps:

1 2 3 4 5

9

5 3

Click iDVD.

4

Click Preferences. Click General. Click Show Apple logo watermark ( Click

.

changes to

).

➥

continued

137

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:10 PM

Page 138

Create a DVD of Your Photos (continued) iDVD offers a number of options for displaying slideshow images. For example, you can change the duration that each image appears (the longer the duration, the fewer images you can place on the disc), and you can specify a transition effect between each image.

SC

EN

ES

Create a DVD of Your Photos (continued)

l iDVD displays the photo in the drop zone.

@ Double-click Photos. @

l iDVD displays the slideshow editor.

# To change the order in which the photos appear during the slideshow, click and drag a photo thumbnail and drop it in the new location.

#

$ To remove a photo from the slideshow, click the photo and then press Del .

138

$

09_384688-ch06.qxp

9/5/08

7:10 PM

Page 139

Viewing and Editing Your Photos

6

chapter

% In the Slide Duration pop-up menu, click and then click the amount of time you want to see each photo.

^ In the Transition pop-up menu, click and then click the type of transition you want to see between each photo.

% ^

& Insert a blank recordable DVD

*

into your Mac’s DVD drive. Note: If you see a dialog box asking what you want to do with the blank DVD, click Ignore.

* Click File. ( Click Burn DVD. Note: You can also press the Burn button ( ).

( +

or click

iDVD burns the photos to the DVD.

) Click Done. )

How can I get my photos to play in a continuous loop? In the iDVD window, follow Steps 12 and 13 to display the project’s slideshow. Click Settings ( ) and then click the Loop slideshow check box ( changes to ). Click OK to put the new settings into effect.

Can I add a music soundtrack to my slideshow? Yes. In the iDVD window, display the slideshow editor, click Media, and then click Audio. Locate the song you want to use. Click and drag the song from the Audio list and drop it on the audio icon ( ). To remove the song, click and drag it from the audio icon and drop it outside of the audio icon.

139

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:25 PM

Page 140

chapter

7

Creating a Movie

Digital Video

101

Your Mac comes with the tools you need to create your own digital video movies. You can import camcorder video, apply scene transitions, add titles, credits, and a soundtrack, and even export your movie to a DVD.

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:25 PM

Page 141

Open and Close iMovie ..................................142 Import a Video File ..........................................144 Add Video Clips to Your Project....................146 Trim a Clip ..........................................................148 Add a Transition Between Clips....................150 Add a Photo ......................................................152 Add a Music Track ............................................154 Record a Voiceover ..........................................156 Add Titles and Credits ....................................158 Play the Movie ..................................................160 Create a DVD of Your Movie ..........................162

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:25 PM

Page 142

Open and Close iMovie Your Mac includes iMovie to enable you to import video from a digital camcorder, view videos, and create your own movies. To begin using the program, you must first learn how to find and open the iMovie window. When you finish using the program, you can close the iMovie window to free up computer-processing power.

CLLOOSE

OPEENN

Open and Close iMovie OPEN IMOVIE

1 Click in the Dock. 2 Click Applications. 3 Double-click iMovie.

3 2

1 The first time you launch iMovie, the program tells you that it must generate video thumbnails. Note: You see this dialog box only if your Mac has at least one digital video file.

4 Click Now.

142

4

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:25 PM

Page 143

Creating a Movie

7

chapter

The iMovie window appears.

CLOSE IMOVIE

1

1 Click iMovie. 2 Click Quit iMovie. 2

Are there faster methods I can use to open iMovie? The fastest way to start iMovie is to click the iMovie icon ( ) in the Dock. If you have used iMovie recently, another reasonably fast method is to click the Apple icon ( ), click Recent Items, and then click iMovie.

Are there faster methods I can use to close iMovie?

Probably the fastest HORT S method you can use to CUT quit iMovie is to click . Alternatively, +click or right-click and then click Quit. Finally, if your hands are closer to the keyboard than to the mouse, you can quit iMovie by pressing + .

Q

143

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:25 PM

Page 144

Import a Video File ... Files Transfering..

If you have video content on a FireWire digital camcorder, you can connect the camcorder to your Mac and then import some or all of the video to your iMovie project. See Chapter 3 to learn how to connect a digital camcorder to your Mac. Import a Video File IMPORT ALL FOOTAGE

1 Connect the digital camcorder to your Mac. iMovie displays its Import From window.

2 Click Import. iMovie rewinds the tape to the beginning, imports all the footage, and then rewinds the tape.

2

iMovie prompts you to create a new event.

3 Use the Create new Event text box to type a name for the import event.

4 Click OK.

144

3 4

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:25 PM

Page 145

Creating a Movie

7

chapter

IMPORT SELECTED FOOTAGE

1 Connect the digital camcorder to your Mac. iMovie displays its Import From window.

2 Click Manual. 3 Click Play ( ). l You can click and hold Seek Forward ( ) to speed up the playback. l If you go too far, you can click and hold Seek Back ( ) to skip back.

3

2

4

4 When you get to the part you want to import, click Import.

iMovie pauses the playback and prompts you to create a new event.

5

5 Use the Create new Event text box to type

6

a name for the import event.

6 Click OK.

7

iMovie restarts the tape and begins importing the video. Note: To skip recording some of the tape, click Stop and then repeat Steps 3 to 6. In the dialog box, be sure to click Add to existing Event ( changes to ).

7 Click Done.

How do I import digital video from my iSight camera? Follow these steps:

1 2 3 4

In iMovie, click File.

3

7 4

Click Import from Camera. In the Video Size pop-up menu, click then click the frame size you want. Click Capture.

and

5 6 7

Follow Steps 5 and 6 on this page. When you are done, click Stop. Click Done.

145

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:25 PM

Page 146

Add Video Clips to Your Project A video clip is a segment of digital video. You begin building your movie by adding one or more video clips to your project. When you import digital video as described in the previous section, iMovie automatically breaks up the video into separate clips.

Add Video Clips to Your Project ADD AN ENTIRE CLIP

3

1 Click the Library item that contains the video clip you want to add.

2 Press and hold the

Option

key

and click the clip. l iMovie selects the entire clip.

3 Click and drag the selected clip and drop it in your project at the spot where you want the clip to appear.

l iMovie adds the entire video clip to the project.

146

1 2

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:25 PM

Page 147

Creating a Movie

7

chapter

ADD A PARTIAL CLIP

1 Click the Library item that contains the video clip you want to add.

4

2 Click the clip at the point where you want the selection to begin.

3 Click and drag the right edge of the selection box to the point where you want the selection to end.

4 Click and drag the selected clip and drop it in your project at the spot where you want the clip to appear.

1 2

3

l iMovie adds the selected portion of the video clip to the project.

Is it possible to play a clip before I add it? Sure. The easiest way to do this is to double-click the clip at the point where you want the playback to start. iMovie plays the clip in the playback area in the top-right corner of the window. Click the clip to stop the playback. If you want to see only a portion of the clip, follow Steps 2 and 3 on this page to make your selection, +click or right-click the clip and then click Play Selection.

I added a clip in the wrong place. Can I move it? Yes. In your project, click the added clip to select it. Use your mouse ( ) to click and drag the clip and then drop the clip in the correct location within the project. If you want to delete the clip from the project, click it, click Edit, and then click Delete Entire Clip.

147

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:25 PM

Page 148

Trim a Clip If you have a video clip that is too long or contains footage you do not need, you can shorten the clip or remove the extra footage. Removing parts of a video clip is called trimming the clip.

Trim a Clip

1 In your project, click the clip you want to trim. l iMovie selects the entire clip.

1

2 Use your mouse ( ) to click and drag the left edge of the selection box to the starting position of the part of the clip you want to keep.

3 Use your mouse ( ) to click and drag the right edge of the selection box to the ending position of the part of the clip you want to keep.

148

2

3

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:25 PM

Page 149

Creating a Movie

4 Click Edit. 5 Click Trim to Selection. Note: You can also press

+

7

chapter

4

.

5

l iMovie trims the clip.

Is it possible to trim a certain number of frames from a clip?

3

Yes, iMovie enables you to trim up to 30 frames (1 second) at a time from either the beginning or the end of the clip. Follow these steps:

1

Position the mouse ( ) over the clip you want to trim.

2

To trim from the beginning, click Fine Tune Clip ( ) near the beginning of the clip.

To trim from the end, click clip, instead.

3

2 l iMovie displays the number of frames you are trimming.

near the end of the

Use your mouse ( ) to click and drag the edge of the selection box.

4

Release the mouse ( ) when you reach the number of frames that you want to trim.

149

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:25 PM

Page 150

Add a Transition Between Clips By default, iMovie jumps immediately from the end of one clip to the beginning of another. You can add more visual interest to your movie by adding a transition between the two clips. iMovie offers a dozen different transitions, including various fades, wipes, and dissolves. Add a Transition Between Clips

1 Click the Transitions browser button ( ).

1

l iMovie displays the available transitions. Note: To see a preview of a transition, position your mouse ( ) over the transition thumbnail.

2 Use your mouse ( ) to click and drag a transition and drop it between the two clips.

150

2

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:25 PM

Page 151

Creating a Movie

7

chapter

l iMovie adds an icon for the transition between the two clips.

3 Position your mouse ( ) over the transition. l iMovie displays a preview of the transition.

3

Can I change the duration of the transition?

4

Yes. The default length is half a second, but you can increase or decrease the duration by following these steps:

1 2 3 4

5 6

Click the transition icon in your project. Click Edit. Click Set Duration (or press

+

).

5

If you want to change only the current transition, click Applies only to selected transition ( changes to ).

6

Click OK.

Use the Duration text box to set the number of seconds you want the transition to take.

151

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:26 PM

Page 152

Add a Photo Although most movie projects consist of several video clips, you can also add a photo to your project. By default, iMovie displays the photo for 4 seconds. You can also specify how the photo fits in the movie frame: You can adjust the size of the photo to fit the frame, you can crop the photo, or you can apply a Ken Burns effect to animate the static photo. Add a Photo

1 Click the Photos browser button ( ). l iMovie displays the available photos.

2 Click and drag a photo and drop

2

1

it inside your project.

l iMovie adds the photo to the movie.

3 Click the Crop button ( ).

3

152

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:26 PM

Page 153

Creating a Movie l iMovie displays the cropping options for the photo.

7

chapter 4

4 Click Ken Burns. l You can also click Fit to have iMovie adjust the size of the photo to fit the movie frame. l You can also click Crop and then click and drag the cropping rectangle to specify how much of the photo you want to appear in the movie frame.

6 7

5 Click and drag the green

5

rectangle to set the start point of the Ken Burns animation.

6 Click and drag the red rectangle to set the end point of the Ken Burns animation. Note: Click and drag the corners and edges of the rectangle to change the size; click and drag the interior of the rectangles to change the position.

7 Click Done.

Can I change the length of time that the photo appears in the movie?

4

Yes. The default length is 4 seconds, but you can increase or decrease the duration by following these steps:

1 2 3 4

5 6

Click the photo in your project. Click Edit. Click Set Duration (or press

+

5

If you want to change the duration for all photos, click Applies to all photos ( changes to ).

6

Click OK.

).

Use the Duration text box to set the number of seconds you want the photo to appear.

153

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:26 PM

Page 154

Add a Music Track You can enhance the audio component of your movie by adding one or more songs that play in the background. To get the best audio experience, you can adjust various sound properties, including the volume of the music clip, the volume of the video clip, and how the song clip fades in and out. Add a Music Track

1 Click the Music and Sound Effects browser button ( ).

2

l iMovie displays the available audio files.

2 Use your mouse ( ) to click and drag a song and drop it inside your project.

l iMovie adds the song to the movie.

3

3 Click the music clip to select it. Note: iMovie treats the song like a clip, which means you can trim the song as needed, as described earlier in the “Trim a Clip” section.

4 Click the Adjust Audio button (

).

4

154

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:26 PM

Page 155

Creating a Movie iMovie displays the Audio Adjustments dialog box.

7

chapter 5

5 Use the Volume slider to adjust the volume of the music clip.

6 If you want to reduce the video 6

clip volume, click Ducking ( changes to ) and then click and drag the slider.

7 To adjust the fade-in time, click Fade In: Manual ( changes to ) and then click and drag the slider.

7 8

8 To adjust the fade-out time, click Fade Out: Manual ( changes to ) and then click and drag the slider.

9

9 Click Done.

When I add a video clip before the music clip, the music does not play with the new video clip. How can I work around this? You need to add your song as a background track instead of a clip. Here are the steps to follow:

1 2 3

Click

.

Use your mouse ( ) to click and drag a song. Drop the song on the project background, not on a clip or between two clips.

3

l The background turns green when you have the song positioned correctly. You can add multiple background tracks, and then click Edit and Arrange Music Tracks to reorder them. To pin a music track to a particular video clip, click and drag the song title to the beginning of the video clip.

155

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:26 PM

Page 156

Record a Voiceover You can augment the audio portion of your movie by recording a voiceover. A voiceover is useful for explaining a video clip, introducing the movie, or giving the viewer background information about the movie. To record a voiceover, your Mac must either have a built-in microphone or an external microphone connected either via the Line In jack, USB port, or Bluetooth. Record a Voiceover

1 If your Mac does not have a builtin microphone, attach a microphone. Note: You may need to configure the microphone as the sound input device. Click , click Sound, click Input, and then click your microphone.

2 Click the Voiceover button ( ).

2

The Voiceover dialog box appears.

3 Click the spot in the movie at which you want the voiceover to begin.

156

3

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:26 PM

Page 157

Creating a Movie iMovie counts down and then begins the recording.

7

chapter 5

4 Speak your voiceover text into the microphone.

5 When you are finished, click Recording.

l iMovie adds the voiceover to the clip.

6 Click Close ( ). to adjust the l You can click voiceover audio, as described in the previous task.

6

Is there a way to tell if my voice is too loud or too soft? Yes, you can use the controls in the Voiceover dialog box. You check your voice level by talking into the microphone and then watching the Left and Right volume meters:

l If you see no green bars or just a few green bars, your voice level is too low.

l If you see yellow or red bars, your voice level is too high. Use the Input Volume slider to adjust the voice level up or down, as needed.

157

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:26 PM

Page 158

Add Titles and Credits You can get your movie off to a proper start by adding a title and a subtitle. iMovie offers a number of title styles that you can choose from. You can also enhance your movie with scrolling credits at the end.

Add Titles and Credits

1 Click the Titles browser button ( ).

1

l iMovie displays the available title types.

2 Use your mouse ( ) to click and drag a title and drop it where you want the titles to appear. Note: To see just the titles, drop the title thumbnail at the beginning of the movie or between two clips. To superimpose the titles on a video clip, drop the title thumbnail on the clip.

l If you want to add credits, click and drag the Scrolling Credits thumbnail and drop it at the end of the movie.

158

2

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:26 PM

Page 159

Creating a Movie

7

chapter

l iMovie adds a clip for the titles.

3 Replace this text with the movie title.

4 Replace this text with the movie subtitle.

3

4

5 Click Done. Note: iMovie treats the title like a clip, which means you can lengthen or shorten the title duration by clicking and dragging the beginning or end, as described earlier in the “Trim a Clip” section.

5

How do I change the font of the titles? The Text menu offers several font-related commands, including Bold, Italic, Bigger, and Smaller. You can also click the Show Fonts command to display the Fonts dialog box.

159

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:26 PM

Page 160

Play the Movie

iMOVIE While you are building your iMovie project, it is a good idea to occasionally play some or all of the movie to make sure the video and audio are working properly and the transitions appear when you want them to.

Play the Movie PLAY FROM THE BEGINNING

1

1 Click View. 2 Click Play from Beginning. Note: You can also press \ or click the Play Project from beginning button ( ).

2

2

PLAY FROM A SPECIFIC LOCATION

1 Click the spot where you want to start playing the movie.

3

2 Click View. 3 Click Play. Note: You can also press double-click the movie location.

160

or

1

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:26 PM

Page 161

Creating a Movie PLAY A SELECTION

7

chapter

1

1 Select the video clips you want to play. Note: See the Tip below to learn how to select multiple video clips.

2 Click View. 3 Click Play Selection.

2

Note: You can also press /.

3

How do I select multiple video clips? To select multiple video NOW clips, press and hold and PLAYING.... then click anywhere inside each clip you want to select. If you select a clip by accident, +click again to deselect it. If you want to skip just a few clips, first press + to select all the clips. Then press and hold and click the clips you do not want in the selection.

Can I enlarge the size of the playback window? Yes, you can play your movie in fullscreen mode. To do this, click View and then click Play Full Screen. You can also press + or click the Play Project full screen button ( ).

161

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:26 PM

Page 162

Create a DVD of Your Movie When your movie project is complete, you can burn it to a recordable DVD disc for playback on your Mac or on your home or portable DVD player. Creating a DVD requires three separate procedures: exporting your iMovie project to a QuickTime video file, importing that video file into iDVD, and then burning the DVD project to disc. Create a DVD of Your Movie EXPORT TO A QUICKTIME VIDEO FILE

1 In iMovie, click Share. 2 Click Export using QuickTime.

The Save Exported File As dialog box appears.

1 2

3

3 Use the Save As text box to type a name for the exported movie file.

4 Click Save. iMovie exports the project to a QuickTime file. Note: Depending on the length of your movie and the number of transitions, music tracks, and other options, it may take an hour or more to export the movie.

162

4

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:26 PM

Page 163

Creating a Movie

7

chapter

IMPORT THE VIDEO FILE TO THE DVD PROJECT

1 In the Dock, click iDVD ( ). 2 Click Add ( ). 3 Click Add Movie. 2 1

3

l iDVD adds a button for the movie.

4 Click Media. 5 Click Movies. 6 Click and drag the movie

5

thumbnail and drop it on the Add Movie Here button.

6

iDVD adds the movie to the DVD project.

4

Is there any way to set up the DVD so that my movie starts as soon as I insert the disc?

2

Yes, by following these steps:

1 2

Click Show the DVD Map (

).

Click and drag your movie and drop it on the map’s first box.

iDVD moves the movie to the beginning of the DVD.

3

Click

1

to return to the main screen.

➥

continued

163

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:26 PM

Page 164

Create a DVD of Your Movie (continued)

SC

EN

ES

You can customize your DVD by choosing a theme, modifying the menu title, and adding a photo to the theme’s drop zone.

Create a DVD of Your Movie (continued) CREATE THE DVD

3

1 Click Themes. 2 Click the theme you want to use.

5

4

Note: If iDVD displays the Change Project Aspect Ratio dialog box, click Change.

3 Double-click the menu title. 4 Use the pop-up menus to set the

2

title font.

5 Type a new title and then press

.

1 6 Click Media. 7 Click Photos. 8 Click and drag a photo and drop

7

it on the theme’s Drop Zone 1. iDVD displays the photo in the drop zone.

8

6

164

10_384688-ch07.qxp

9/5/08

9:26 PM

Page 165

Creating a Movie

9 Insert a blank recordable DVD

7

chapter

0

into your Mac’s DVD drive. Note: If you see a dialog box asking what you want to do with the blank DVD, click Ignore.

0 Click File. ! Click Burn DVD. Note: You can also press Burn button ( ).

+

or click the

!

iDVD burns the movie to the DVD.

@ Click Done. @

How can I display a still from my movie in the main menu?

2

Follow these steps:

1

Follow Steps 6 to 8 on the previous page, except click Movies instead of Photos, and drag and drop your movie on the drop zone.

2

Click and drag the Movie Start bar until you see the frame you want to use.

3

Click and drag the Movie End bar until it is flush with the Movie Start bar.

3

165

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:27 PM

Page 166

chapter

8

Surfing the World Wide Web HBISM Home Page http://www.surﬁngmuseum.org

google

HBISM Home Page http://www.surﬁngmuseum.org

google

If your Mac is connected to the Internet either directly or through a network connection, you can use the Safari Web browser application to navigate — or surf — the sites of the World Wide Web. This chapter shows you how to navigate from site to site and how to make surfing the Web easier.

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:27 PM

Page 167

Open and Close Safari ....................................168 Select a Link ......................................................170 Enter a Web Page Address ............................171 Open a Web Page in a Tab ............................172 Navigate Web Pages ........................................174 Navigate with the History List ......................176 Change Your Home Page ................................178 Bookmark Web Pages ....................................180 Search for Sites ................................................182 Download a File................................................184

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:28 PM

Page 168

Open and Close Safari Your Mac includes the Safari application to enable you to surf Web sites when your Mac is connected to the Internet. You can also use Safari to save your favorite sites and navigate your surfing history.

close open

Open and Close Safari OPEN SAFARI

1 Click Finder ( ) in the Dock. 2 Click Applications. 3 Double-click Safari.

3 2

1 The Safari window appears.

168

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:28 PM

Page 169

Surfing the World Wide Web CLOSE SAFARI

8

chapter

1

1 Click Safari.

2 Click Quit Safari.

2

Are there faster methods I can use to open Safari?

Are there faster methods I can use to close Safari?

The fastest way to start Safari is to click the Safari icon ( ) in the Dock. If you have used Safari recently, another reasonably fast method is to click , click Recent Items, and then click Safari.

Probably the fastest method you can use to quit Safari is to +click or right-click and then click Quit. Finally, if your hands are closer to the keyboard than to the mouse, you can quit Safari by pressing + .

click

T SHORT CU

Q

169

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:28 PM

Page 170

Select a Link Saltwater Fish http://www.saltwaterﬁsh.com

Almost all Web pages include links to other pages that contain information related to something in the current page, and you can use these links to navigate to other Web pages. When you select a link, your Web browser loads the other page.

google

Angelﬁsh Clownﬁsh Lionﬁsh Bicinctus Clownﬁsh http://www.saltwaterﬁsh.com/clownﬁsh

Knowing which words, phrases, or images are links is not always obvious. The only way to tell for sure in many cases is to position the mouse ( ) over the text or image; if the changes to , you know you are dealing with a link. Select a Link

1 Position over the link ( changes to

).

2 Click the text or image. l The status bar shows the address of the page that the link will take you to. Note: The address shown in the status bar when you point at a link may be different than the one shown when the page is downloading. This occurs when the Web site “redirects” the link, which happens frequently.

2 1

The linked Web page appears. l The status bar shows the current download status. l The Web page title and address change after the linked page is loaded.

170

google

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:28 PM

Page 171

Enter a Web Page Address

Surfing the World Wide Web

If you know the address of a specific Web page, you can type it into the Web browser and the program displays the page.

8

chapter Bicinctus Clownﬁsh http://www.saltwaterﬁsh.com/clownﬁsh

google

Enter a Web Page Address

1 Click inside the address bar. 2 Press Del to delete the existing address.

3 1

3 Type the address of the Web page you want to visit.

4 Press

.

The Web page appears. l The Web page title changes after the page is loaded.

171

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:28 PM

Page 172

Open a Web Page in a Tab

Giganews- Internet http://www.timeonline.com/

google

net Library- Inter Internet Public m/

google

http://www.ipl.co

The Internet Public Library

Time On-line - Internet http://www.timeonline.com/

google

Search

GO

Spotlight ISP Special!

TIME

Online Edition

LOGIN TO THE ARCHIVE

Search Entire Site

You can make it easier to work with multiple Web pages and sites simultaneously by opening each page in its own tab.

SEARCH

RECENT NEWS

CURRENT ISSUE SUBSCRIBE CNN

Search GO

TIME

Instapun di t-

t- Intern http://w et ww.insta Instap pund un

You can open as many pages as you want in their own tabs. This is convenient because all the pages appear within a single Safari window.

it.com/ INSTA dant PUND Internet Pub... IT.CO M

ABOUT ME

| PDA | BACKUP

| EXTRA | OTHER WRITING

S | PRIN T | XML | ARCH IVES

Open a Web Page in a Tab OPEN A LINK IN A NEW TAB

1

+click or right-click the link you want to open.

2 Click Open Link in New Tab.

1 2

l A new tab appears with the page title.

3 Click the tab to display the page.

172

3

google

| FAQ | TERMS

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:28 PM

Page 173

Surfing the World Wide Web CREATE A NEW TAB

8

chapter

1 2

1 Click File. 2 Click New Tab.

l Safari creates a new tab.

3

3 Type the address of the page you want to load into the new tab.

4 Press

.

Safari displays the page in the tab.

Are there any shortcuts I can use to open Web pages in tabs? Here are some useful keyboard techniques:

l Press and hold l Press and hold

and click a link to open the page in a tab. +

and click a link to open the page in a tab and

display the tab.

l Type an address and then press l Type an address and then press

+

SHORT CUT

to open the page in a new tab. +

+

to open the page in a

new foreground tab.

l Press l Press l Press

+ +

+

or

+

+

to cycle through the tabs.

to close the current tab.

Option and click

to close every tab but the one you clicked.

173

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:28 PM

Page 174

Navigate Web Pages After you have visited several pages, you can return to a page you visited earlier. Instead of retyping the address or looking for the link, Safari gives you some easier methods.

Website.com http://www.website.com Website.com http://www.website.com

1

1 Click the Previous Page ).

The previous page you visited appears.

1

GO BACK SEVERAL PAGES

1 Click and hold down on A list of the pages you have visited appears.

2 Click the page you want to display. The page appears.

174

google

Website.com

Website.com

Navigate Web Pages

icon (

http://www.website.com

http://www.website.com

When you navigate Web pages, you can go back to a page you have visited in the current browser session. After you have done that, you can also reverse course and go forward through the pages again.

GO BACK ONE PAGE

google

Website.com google

.

2

google

http://www.website.com

goog

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:28 PM

Page 175

Surfing the World Wide Web GO FORWARD ONE PAGE

8

chapter

1

1 Click the Next Page icon ( ). The next page you visited appears. Note: If you are at the last page viewed up to that point, is not active.

GO FORWARD SEVERAL PAGES

1 Click and hold down on

1

.

A list of the pages you have visited appears.

2 Click the page you want to

2

display. The page appears.

Are there any shortcuts I can use to navigate Web pages? Yes, there are a few useful keyboard shortcuts you can use:

l Press l Press l Press

+

to go back one page.

+

to go forward one page.

SHORT CUT

+ + to return to the Safari home page (the first page you see when you open Safari).

175

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:28 PM

Page 176

Navigate with the History List The Previous Page and Next Page buttons ( and ) enable you to navigate pages only in the current browser session. To redisplay sites that you have visited in the past few days or weeks, you need to use the History list.

Website.com http://www.website.com

google

Page

Tools

If you visit sensitive places such as an Internet banking site or your corporate site, you can increase security by clearing the History list so that other people cannot see where you have been. Navigate with the History List LOAD A PAGE FROM THE HISTORY LIST

1

1 Click History. 2 Click the date when you visited the page.

2

A list of pages that you visited during that day appears.

3 Click the page you want to display.

3

176

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:28 PM

Page 177

Surfing the World Wide Web

8

chapter

l The page appears.

CLEAR THE HISTORY LIST

1

1 Click History. 2 Click Clear History. Safari deletes all the pages from the History list.

2

Can I control the length of time that Safari keeps track of the pages I visit?

5

Yes, by following these steps:

1 2 3 4

In the menu bar, click Safari.

5

Click

3

Click Preferences. Click General. In the Remove history items pop-up menu, click and then click the amount of time you want Safari to track your history.

4

.

177

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:28 PM

Page 178

Change Your Home Page Your home page is the Web page that appears when you first start Safari. The default home page is usually the Apple.com Start page, but you can change that to any other page you want. Safari also comes with a command that enables you to view the home page at any time during your browsing session. Change Your Home Page

1

CHANGE THE HOME PAGE

1 Display the Web page that you want to use as your home page.

2 Click Safari. 3 Click Preferences.

178

2 3

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:28 PM

Page 179

Surfing the World Wide Web

4 Click General. 5 Click Set to Current Page. l Safari inserts the address of the current page in the Home page text box.

6 4

Note: If your Mac is not currently connected to the Internet, you can also type the new home page address manually using the Home page text box.

6 Click

8

chapter

5

.

VIEW THE HOME PAGE

1 2

1 Click History. 2 Click Home. Note: You can also display the home page by pressing + + .

Safari displays the home page.

Can I get Safari to open a new window without displaying the home page?

5

Yes, by following these steps:

1 2 3 4

In the menu bar, click Safari.

5

Click

3

Click Preferences.

4

Click General. In the New windows open with pop-up menu, click then click Empty Page.

and

.

179

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:28 PM

Page 180

Bookmark Web Pages Website.com http://www.website.com

google

Bookmarks

If you have Web pages that you visit frequently, you can save yourself time by saving those pages as bookmarks within Safari. This enables you to display the pages with just a couple of mouse clicks. In Safari, the Bookmarks bar appears just below the address bar. You can put your favorite sites on the Bookmarks bar for easiest access.

Bookmark Web Pages

2

BOOKMARK A WEB PAGE

3

1 Display the Web page you want to save as a bookmark.

2 Click Bookmarks. 3 Click Add Bookmark.

The Add Bookmark dialog box appears. Note: You can also display the Add Bookmark dialog box by pressing + .

4 Edit the page name, as necessary. 5 Click and then click the location where you want to store the bookmark.

6 Click Add. Safari adds a bookmark for the page.

180

1

4

5 6

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:28 PM

Page 181

Surfing the World Wide Web DISPLAY A BOOKMARKED WEB PAGE

8

chapter

1

1 Click the Show all bookmarks button (

).

l If you added the bookmark to the Bookmarks bar, click the page name. l If you added the bookmark to a folder, click the folder and then click the page name. The Bookmarks window appears.

2 Click

to open the folder that contains the bookmark you want ( changes to ).

3 Double-click the bookmark.

2

The Web page appears.

3

Yes, there is. Safari automatically assigns keyboard shortcuts to the first nine bookmarks, counting from left to right and not including folders. For example, you display the leftmost bookmark by pressing the right, the shortcuts are + on.

How do I delete a bookmark?

www w w w

w

ww

w If the site is on the w w Bookmarks bar, w ww +click or right-click the bookmark and then click Delete. For all other bookmarks, click to display the Bookmarks window. Locate the bookmark you want to remove, +click or right-click the bookmark, and then click Delete. You can also click the bookmark and then press Del . www

I use my Bookmarks bar a lot. Is there an easier way to display these pages?

+ . Moving to , + , and so

181

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:28 PM

Page 182

Search for Sites If you need information on a specific topic, Safari has a built-in feature that enables you to quickly search the Web for sites that have the information you require.

Website.com website.com Windows Internet Explor http://www.website.com http://www.website.com

google

Website Home Page

Website.com http://www.website.com

Website.com google

Website.com http://www.website.com

http://www.website.com

google

Website.com google

http://www.website.com

google

The Web has a number of sites called search engines that enable you to find what you are looking for. By default, Safari uses the Google search site (www.google.com). Search for Sites

1 Click in the search box.

2 Type a word, phrase, or question that represents the information you want to find.

3 Press

182

.

1

2

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:29 PM

Page 183

Surfing the World Wide Web

8

chapter

l A list of pages that match your search text appears.

4 Click a Web page.

4

The page appears.

Is there an easy way that I can rerun a recent search?

1

Yes, Safari maintains a list of the last few searches you ran. Follow these steps to quickly rerun one of those searches:

1

In the search box, click the See your recent searches icon ( ).

2

Click the search you want to rerun.

2

l In many cases you can also click the Snapback icon ( ) to rerun the most recent search. Safari sends the search text to Google again.

183

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:29 PM

Page 184

Download a File Some Web sites make files available for you to open on your Mac. To use these files, you must first download them to your Mac using Safari. To use a file from a Web site, you must have an application designed to work with that particular file type. For example, if the file is an Excel workbook, you need either Excel for the Mac or a compatible program. Download a File

1 Navigate to the page that contains the link to the file.

1

2 Click the link to the file. Safari downloads the file to your Mac.

2

184

11_384688-ch08.qxp

9/5/08

7:29 PM

Page 185

Surfing the World Wide Web

8

chapter

l The Downloads window shows the progress of the download.

3 When the download is complete, +click or right-click the file.

3

4 Click Open.

4 The file opens in the corresponding application.

How do I remove items from my Downloads window?

3

Follow these steps:

1 2

In Safari, click Window.

4

Click Downloads. The Downloads window appears. You can also display the Downloads window by pressing Option + + .

3

+click or right-click the downloaded file you want to remove.

4

Click Remove From List.

l If you want to delete the downloaded file itself, click Show in Finder (

) and then delete the file

from the Downloads folder.

185

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:30 PM

Page 186

chapter

9

Communicating via E-mail and Chat

inb

ox

You can use the Apple Mail application to send e-mail to and read e-mail from friends, family, colleagues, and even total strangers almost anywhere in the world. You can also use the iChat application to exchange instant messages. This chapter shows you how to perform these and many more communications tasks.

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:30 PM

Page 187

Open and Close Mail ......................................188 Add an E-mail Account ..................................190 Send an E-mail Message ................................192 Add a File Attachment ....................................194 Add a Signature ................................................196 Receive and Read E-mail Messages ............198 Reply to a Message..........................................200 Forward a Message..........................................202 Open and Close iChat ....................................204 Add a Buddy ......................................................206 Start a Text Chat ..............................................208 Start an Audio Chat ........................................210

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:30 PM

Page 188

Open and Close Mail Your Mac includes the Apple Mail application to enable you to use an e-mail account to exchange and manage e-mail messages. Before you can send or receive e-mail messages, you must know how to start the Mail application.

OPEN

Open and Close Mail OPEN MAIL

1 Click Finder ( ) in the Dock. 2 Click Applications. 3 Double-click the Mail icon ( ).

3 2

1 Note: If the Welcome to Mail dialog box appears, see the next task to learn how to set up your first e-mail account in Mail.

The Mail window appears.

188

CLOSED

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:30 PM

Page 189

Communicating via E-mail and Chat CLOSE MAIL

9

chapter

1

1 Click Mail.

2 Click Quit Mail.

2

SHO

The fastest way to start Mail is to click the Mail icon ( ) in the Dock. If you have used Mail recently, another reasonably fast method is to click , click Recent Items, and then click Mail.

RTCU T

Are there faster methods I can use to close Mail? Probably the fastest method you can use to quit Mail is to +click or right-click and then click Quit. If your hands are closer to the keyboard than to the mouse, you can quit Mail by pressing + .

TCUT SHOR

Are there faster methods I can use to open Mail?

189

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:30 PM

Page 190

Add an E-mail Account Before you can send an e-mail message, you must add your e-mail account to the Mail application. This also enables you to use Mail to retrieve the messages that others have sent to your account. Your e-mail account is usually a POP (Post Office Protocol) account supplied by your Internet service provider, which should have supplied you with the POP account details. You can also set up Mail with your MobileMe account, if you have one. Add an E-mail Account GET STARTED ADDING AN ACCOUNT

1

1 Click File. 2 Click Add Account. Note: If you are just starting Mail and the Welcome to Mail dialog box is on-screen, you can skip Steps 1 and 2.

The Add Account dialog box appears. If you are starting Mail for the first time, the Welcome to Mail dialog box is identical.

2

ADD A MOBILEME ACCOUNT

1 Use the Full Name text box to type your name. 2 Use the Email Address text box to type your MobileMe account address.

3 Use the Password text box to type your

1

MobileMe account password.

2 3

4 Click Automatically set up account (

changes to

).

4

5 Click Create. Mail adds your MobileMe account.

190

5

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:30 PM

Page 191

Communicating via E-mail and Chat

9

chapter

ADD A POP ACCOUNT

1 Use the Full Name text box to type your name. 2 Use the Email Address text box to type your POP

1

account address.

3 Use the Password text box to type your POP account

2

3

password. Click Continue.

4 In the Account Type list, click and then click POP. 5 Use the Description text box to describe the account.

4

5 6

6 Use the Incoming Mail Server text box to type the address of the account’s incoming mail server.

7

Note: The incoming mail server is also sometimes called the POP or POPD server.

7 Edit the User Name text as required. Click Continue. 8 Type a Description of the outgoing mail server. 9 Type the address of the Outgoing Mail Server.

8

9

Note: The outgoing mail server is also sometimes called the SMTP server.

l If your ISP requires authentication, click Use Authentication ( changes to ).

0 Click Continue. Click Continue again. Click Create.

My e-mail account requires me to use a nonstandard outgoing mail port. How do I set this up? Follow these steps:

1 2 3 4

5

Click the outgoing mail server.

3

6 7

Click Advanced.

5

In the menu bar, click Mail. Click Preferences. Click Accounts. In the Outgoing Mail Server (SMTP) list, click and then click Edit Server List.

8 9 0

Use the Server port text box to type the nonstandard port number.

6

Click OK. Click

.

Click Save.

7 8

191

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:30 PM

Page 192

Send an E-mail Message If you know the e-mail address of a person or organization, you can send an e-mail message to that address. In most cases, the message is delivered within a few minutes. If you do not know any e-mail addresses, or if at first you prefer to just practice sending messages, you can send messages to your own e-mail address.

Send an E-mail Message

1

1 Click New Message. Note: You can also start a new message by pressing + .

A message window appears.

2 Use the To field to type the e-mail address of the person to whom you are sending the message.

3 To send a copy of the message to another person, use the Cc field to type that person’s e-mail address. Note: You can add multiple e-mail addresses in both the To line and the Cc line. Separate each address with a comma (,).

4 Use the Subject field to type a title or short description for the message.

192

2

3

4

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:30 PM

Page 193

Communicating via E-mail and Chat

9

chapter

5 Type the message. l To change the message font, you can click Fonts to display the Fonts dialog box. l To change the text colors, you can click Colors to display the Color palette.

5

l To change the overall look of the message, click Show Stationery and then click a theme. Note: Many people use e-mail programs that cannot process text formatting. Unless you are sure your recipient’s program supports formatting, it is best to send plain-text messages. To do this, click Format and then click Make Plain Text.

6

6 Click Send. Mail sends your message. Note: Mail stores a copy of your message in the Sent folder.

I have a large number of messages to compose. Do I have to be online to do this? No, composing all the messages while you are offline is possible. Follow these steps:

1 2

While disconnected from the Internet, start Mail.

3

Compose and send the message. Each time you click Send, your message is stored temporarily in the Outbox folder.

4

When you are done, connect to the Internet.

To ensure you are working offline, click Mailbox. If the Take All Accounts Offline command is enabled, click that command.

Outbox

After a few moments, Mail automatically sends all the messages sitting in the Outbox folder.

193

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:30 PM

Page 194

Add a File Attachment If you have a memo, photo, or other document that you want to send to another person, you can attach the document to an e-mail message. The other person can then open the document after he or she receives your message.

Add a File Attachment

1

1 Click New Message.

A message window appears.

2 Click Attach.

194

2

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:31 PM

Page 195

Communicating via E-mail and Chat

9

chapter

A file selection dialog box appears.

3 Click the file you want to attach. 4 Click Choose File.

3

4 l Mail attaches the file to the message. Note: Another way to attach a file to a message is to click and drag the file from Finder and drop it inside the message.

5 Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to attach additional files to the message.

6 Fill in the rest of the fields and then send your message as described in the previous section.

Is there a limit to the number of files I can attach to a message? 2

0 30 28

10

18

16 14 12

inb

24 22 20

8 6 4

26

There is no practical limit to the number of files you can attach to the message. However, you should be careful with the total size of the files you send. If you or the recipient has a slow Internet connection, sending or receiving the message can take an extremely long time. Also, many ISPs place a limit on the size of a message’s attachments, which is usually between 2MB and 5MB. In general, use e-mail to send only a few small files at a time.

ox

195

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:31 PM

Page 196

Add a Signature

m i Ad t ame ipsu ipis t, c m cin ons dolo ge lit ectet r uer

In an e-mail message, a signature is a small amount of text that appears at the bottom of the message. Rather than typing this information manually in each message, you can create the signature once and then have Mail automatically add the signature to any message you send.

sit olor m d er ipsu tu em nsecte d diam se d co et, g elit, uismo re e in lo pisc y nibh eet do tpat. r umm ut lao rat volu niam, e t e im v idun iq uam aliq ad min tation nisl a n g nim xerci bortis see i wis trud e cipit lo o con d s s e s no per su commo iriur elit v um or a amc ip ex e vel e lputate m m lu u u e il t q v el ali is au it in v , t er ua Du at. hendr onseq c in or lestie t o ia se m u feug e ore

LO R

EM

IP SU M

.N ET

Signatures usually contain personal contact information, such as your phone number, business address, and e-mail and Web site addresses. Some people supplement their signatures with wise or witty quotations. Add a Signature

1

CREATE A SIGNATURE

1 Click Mail. 2 Click Preferences.

2

The Mail preferences appear.

3

3 Click Signatures. 4 Click the account for which you want to use the signature.

5 Click Create a signature ( ).

4

Mail adds a new signature.

5

196

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:31 PM

Page 197

Communicating via E-mail and Chat

6 Type a name for the signature. 7 Type the signature text. 8 Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to add other

9

chapter

9 6

signatures, if required.

7

Note: You can add as many signatures as you want. For example, you may want to have one signature for business use and another for personal use.

9 Click

.

INSERT THE SIGNATURE

1 Click New Message to start a new message. Note: To see how to start a new message, refer to the section “Send an E-mail Message” earlier in this chapter.

2 In the message text area, move the insertion point to the location where you want the signature to appear.

3

3 In the Signature pop-up menu, click and then click the signature you 2 want to insert. l The signature appears in the message.

Can I get Mail to add my signature automatically?

4

Yes, by following these steps:

1

Follow Steps 1 to 4 to display the signature preferences and choose an account.

2

In the Choose Signature pop-up menu, click and then click the signature you want to insert automatically into each message.

3

Click Place signature above quoted text (

changes to

).

If you prefer that your signature appear at the very bottom of your replies and forwards, turn off the Place signature above quoted text check box (

4

Click

2

3 changes to

).

.

197

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:31 PM

Page 198

Receive and Read E-mail Messages A message sent to you by another person is stored on your ISP’s e-mail server computer. You must connect to the ISP’s computer to retrieve and read the message. As you see in this section, Mail does most of the work for you automatically. Mail checks for new messages when you start the program automatically, and then checks for more messages every 5 minutes while you are online. Receive and Read E-mail Messages RECEIVE E-MAIL MESSAGES

1 Click Get Mail.

l The Mail Activity area lets you know if you have any incoming messages. l If you have new messages, they appear in your Inbox folder with a blue dot in this column. l Messages from Apple appear in your Inbox folder with a blue background. icon in the Dock shows l The the number of unread messages in the Inbox folder.

198

1

jon@ab

c.com

ann@ abc.c om jay@

abc.c om

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:31 PM

Page 199

Communicating via E-mail and Chat

9

chapter

READ A MESSAGE

1 Click the message.

1

2 Read the message text in the preview pane. Note: If you want to open the message in its own window, double-click the message.

2

Can I change how often Mail automatically checks for messages?

5

Yes, by following these steps:

1 2

Click Mail.

3 4

Click Preferences. The Mail preferences appear.

3 4

Click the General tab. In the Check for new mail pop-up menu, click and then click the time interval that you want Mail to use when checking for new messages automatically.

l If you do not want Mail to check for messages automatically, click Manually, instead.

5

Click

.

199

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:31 PM

Page 200

Reply to a Message Won’t yoinuthjoeinGusarden? for tea ase do reply. Ple oodhouse Miss EmmaW

When a message you receive requires some kind of response — whether it is answering a question, supplying information, or providing comments or criticisms — you can send a reply to the person who sent that message.

RS VP

me, r invitinatgtend! o f u o Y ThanIk shall certainly htley hn Knig o J r. M

Reply to a Message

2

1 Click the message to which you want to reply.

2 Click the reply type you want to use. Click Reply to respond only to the first address displayed on the message’s To line. Click Reply All to respond to all the addresses in the message’s To and Cc lines.

A message window appears. l Mail automatically inserts the recipient addresses. l Mail also inserts the subject line, preceded by Re:. l Mail includes the original message text at the bottom of the reply.

200

1

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:31 PM

Page 201

Communicating via E-mail and Chat

9

chapter

3 Edit the original message to include only the text that is relevant to your reply. Note: If the original message is fairly short, you usually do not need to edit the text. However, if the original message is long, and your response deals only with part of that message, you will save the recipient time and confusion by deleting everything except the relevant portion of the text.

4 Click the area above the original message text and type your reply.

3

5

5 Click Send. Mail sends your reply. Note: Mail stores a copy of your reply in the Sent folder.

I received a message inadvertently. Is there a way that I can pass it along to the correct recipient?

4

How should I respond to a message that is hostile or rude? jim@ab colin@m c.net ail.com

Yes. Mail comes with a feature that enables you to pass along inadvertent messages to the correct recipient. Click the message that you received inadvertently, click Message, and then click Redirect (or press + + ). Type the recipient’s address and then click Send. Replies to this message will be sent to the original sender, not to you.

lid If you receive an unpleasant message, nva eetss [email protected] r it is best not to respond directly to d ad the sender because that most often just encourages that person to send you more messages. A much better way to handle this situation is to return a bounce message that makes it appear your address is not valid. Click the message that you received, click Message, and + + ). then click Bounce (or press

201

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:31 PM

Page 202

SA G E

ASE PLE WARD FOR

MESSAGE

M

If a message has information that is relevant to or concerns another person, you can forward a copy of that message to the other recipient. You can also include your own comments in the forward.

ES

P FORLEASE WAR D

Forward a Message

PLEASE FORWARD ME

E AS D PLERWAR FO

SSA GE

E

MESSAG

SE PLEAARD FORW MESSAGE

Forward a Message

2

1 Click the message that you want to forward.

2 Click Forward. Note: You can also press

+

+

.

1

A message window appears. l Mail inserts the subject line, preceded by Fwd:. l The original message’s addresses (To and From), date, subject, and text are included at the bottom of the forward.

3 Type the e-mail address of the person to whom you are forwarding the message.

4 To send a copy of the forward to another person, type that person’s e-mail address (shown here in the Cc line).

202

3

4

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:31 PM

Page 203

Communicating via E-mail and Chat

9

chapter

5 Edit the original message to include only the text that is relevant to your forward.

6 Click the area above the original

5

message text and type your comments.

7

7 Click Send. Mail sends your forward. Note: Mail stores a copy of your forward in the Sent folder.

6

Note: You can forward someone a copy of the actual message instead of just a copy of the message text. Click the message, click Message, and then click Forward As Attachment. Mail creates a new message and includes the original message as an attachment.

Mail always formats my replies as rich text, even when the original message is plain text. How can I fix this problem?

5 3

You can configure Mail to always reply using the same format as the original message. Follow these steps:

1 2

Click Mail. Click Preferences. The Mail preferences appear.

3 4 5

Click the Composing tab. Click the Use the same message format as the original message check box ( changes to ). Click

4

.

203

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:31 PM

Page 204

Open and Close iChat

iChat

Your Mac includes the iChat application to enable you to exchange instant messages with other people who are online. Before you can send or receive instant messages, you must know how to start the iChat application.

OPEN

CLOSED

The first time you open iChat, you must run through a short configuration process to set up your account. Open and Close iChat OPEN ICHAT

1 Click in the Dock. 2 Click Applications. 3 Double-click iChat.

3

2

1 CONFIGURE YOUR ICHAT ACCOUNT

The first time you open iChat, the Welcome to iChat dialog box appears.

4 Click Continue.

4

204

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:31 PM

Page 205

Communicating via E-mail and Chat

9

chapter

The Account Setup dialog box appears.

5 In the Account Type pop-up menu, click

and then click the

type of account you want to use with iChat.

5

6 Type the account name. 7 Type the account password. 8 Click Continue.

6

7

8 If you are using a MobileMe account, the Encrypted iChat dialog box appears.

9 If you do not need to encrypt your messages for security, click Enable iChat encryption (

changes to

).

9

0 Click Continue.

0 The Conclusion dialog box appears.

! Click Done.

!

Are there faster methods I can use to open iChat? The fastest way to start iChat is to click the iChat icon ( ) in the Dock. If you have used iChat recently, another reasonably fast method is to click , click Recent Items, and then click iChat.

How do I close iChat?

SHORT CUT

In the menu bar, click iChat and then click Quit iChat. Probably the fastest method you can use to quit iChat is to +click or right-click and then click Quit. If your hands are closer to the keyboard than to the mouse, you can quit iChat by pressing + .

SHORT CUT

205

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:31 PM

Page 206

Add a Buddy ne) ffli

(O ake

ne) ffli

J

You send instant messages to, and receive instant messages from, the people in your buddy list, which is also called a contact list. Before you can send an instant message to a person, you must add the person to your iChat buddy list.

t (O Mat

NE) NLI a (O t i ) R line Off ve ( e t e) S flin (Of y e l Ash

iChat enables you to maintain your buddy list by adding and deleting people, and it tells you the current online status of each person on the list. Add a Buddy

1 Click Buddies. 2 Click Add Buddy.

1 2

Note: You can also run the Add Buddy command by pressing + + .

iChat prompts you for the buddy’s AIM (AOL Instant Messenger) or MobileMe account information.

3 In the pop-up menu beside the Account Name text box, click and then click your buddy’s account type: AIM or MobileMe.

206

3

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:31 PM

Page 207

Communicating via E-mail and Chat

9

chapter

4 Use the Account Name text box to specify your buddy’s AIM screen name or MobileMe address.

4

5 Use the First Name text box to type your buddy’s first name.

5 6

6 Use the Last Name text box to type your buddy’s last name.

7

7 Click Add. l iChat adds the person to your buddy list.

Is there a way to change the picture that iChat uses for my buddy? Yes. By default, iChat uses whatever picture your buddy has configured for himself or herself. To display a different picture, follow these steps:

1 2 3 4 5 6

Click the buddy.

7

Click

7

4

Click Buddies.

5 6

Click Show Info. Click Address Card. Click Always use this picture (

changes to

).

Click and drag the picture you want to use and drop it on the Picture box. .

207

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:31 PM

Page 208

Start a Text Chat

Me: Me: How’s How’s the the weather weather in in Colorado? Colorado?

In iChat, an instant-messaging conversation is most often the exchange of text messages between two or more people who are online and available to chat.

Instant Messaging Logged in as: Jake

Instant Messaging

Instant Messaging

Me: How’s the weather in Colorado? Jerome: Not too bad, it’s snowing in June.

Me: Good thing i’m here in Palo Verde, Ca. soaking up the sun!

File Action Tools Help

File Action Tools Help

My Status: Jerome (Online)

My Status: Jake (Online)

Jerome: Yea, tell Uncle Steve I said Hi!

Ashley Jo (Online)

Ashley Jo (Online)

Jake (Online)

Jerome (Online) Oh I will.......

Send

Jill (Online)

Jill (Online)

Kaeppel (Idle)

Kaeppel (Idle)

Barry (Away)

Barry (Away)

Pamela Jo (Away)

Pamela Jo (Away)

Instant Messaging Logged in as: Jerome Jake: How’s the weather in Colorado? Me: Not too bad, it’s snowing in June.

+ ADD A CONTACT

+ ADD A CONTACT

Jake: Good thing i’m here in Palo Verde, Ca. soaking up the sun! Me: Yea, tell Uncle Steve I said Hi!

Send an Instant Message

Send an Instant Message

Send

An instant-messaging conversation begins by one person inviting another person to exchange messages. In iChat, this means sending an initial instant message, and the recipient either accepts or rejects the invitation.

Jerome: Jerome:Not Nottoo toobad, bad,it’s it’s snowing snowingininJune. June.

Start a Text Chat

3

SEND AN INVITATION

1 In iChat’s AIM Buddy List, make sure the person’s status icon is green ( ). Note: The icon means that the person is available to chat; a red icon ( ) means that the person is not available to chat; and a yellow icon ( ) means the person is idle: available, but not actively using iChat.

1 2

4

2 Click the person you want to chat with.

3 Click Buddies. 4 Click Invite to Chat.

A chat window appears.

5 Type your invitation or opening message.

6 Press

.

The invitation appears on the other person’s computer.

5

208

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:31 PM

Page 209

Communicating via E-mail and Chat

9

chapter

ACCEPT AN INVITATION

1 Click the invitation.

1

2 Type a response. Note: If the person who sent the message is not on your buddy list, iChat does not display the message. To see the message, you must click Display.

3 Click Accept. l If you cannot chat right now, click Decline, instead.

2 3

l The response appears in the chat window.

4 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 from the previous page to continue chatting.

Are there faster methods I can use to start a text chat?

SHORT CUT

Is there a way to automatically decline a person who is bothering me?

hi!

Yes. If your hand is on the mouse, use the AIM Buddy List window to click the person you want to chat with and then click the Start a Text Chat button ( ). From the keyboard, you can start a text chat with the selected buddy by pressing + + .

T Yes, there is. If you no longer want to SHORT receive messages from a sender who is CU annoying, abusive, or offensive, iChat BLOCKED enables you to block that sender. This means that iChat will no longer allow messages from that person to go through. When a chat alert message comes through from that person, click the message and then click Block. When iChat asks you to confirm, click Block again.

209

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:31 PM

Page 210

Start an Audio Chat If you and the buddy with whom you want to converse both have a microphone attached to your computers, a sound card, and speakers, you can converse with each other just as though you were talking over the phone. iChat comes with an audio chat feature that enables you to speak to another person over the Internet. Start an Audio Chat

3

SEND AN INVITATION

1 In iChat’s AIM Buddy List, make

1

sure the person’s status icon is green ( ). Note: Also make sure that the person shows the telephone icon ( ) or the camera icon ( ), which means the person has the equipment required for an audio chat.

2

2 Click the person you want to audio chat with.

3 Click Buddies. 4 Click Invite to Audio Chat.

An audio chat window appears and iChat waits for a response to the invitation. The invitation appears on the other person’s computer.

210

4

12_384688-ch09.qxp

9/5/08

9:31 PM

Page 211

Communicating via E-mail and Chat

9

chapter

ACCEPT AN INVITATION

1 Click the invitation. 1

2 Click Accept. l If you prefer to text chat, click Text Reply to begin a separate text chat. l If you cannot chat right now, click Decline.

2 iChat sets up the audio connection.

3 Use your microphone to converse with the other person. l You can click and drag the slider to control the chat volume.

Can I start a video chat? Yes, if you and the contact with whom you want to converse both have a Web camera, microphone, sound card, and speakers attached to your computer, you can both see and talk to each other at the same time. iChat comes with a video chat feature that enables you to see each other’s Web camera image and hear each other’s voice. If the other person shows the camera icon ( ), click that person, click Buddies, and then click Invite to Video Chat.

Are there faster methods I can use to start an audio or video chat? Yes. First, use the AIM Buddy List window to click the person you want to chat with. For an audio chat, click the Start an Audio Chat button ( ); for a video chat, click the Start a Video Chat button ( ).

START A CHAT

211

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:39 PM

Page 212

chapter

Working with Contacts and Appointments U

y da tur Sa

VACATIO N SS

B

6 08 5 0 2 4 er b m 3 pte Se 1 2 ay esd

W

ay

y da urs Th

21

7

8

nd

E O N VOYAG

15 9 10 16 28 22 23 17 11 12 29 1 30 24 25 8 19 13 31 26 20 27

Tu

y

14

M

Su

y da on

a esd edn

y ida Fr

You may find that your life is busier than ever, and the number of appointments you have to keep and tasks you have to perform seem to increase daily. Fortunately, your Mac comes with two applications that can help you manage your busy schedule. You use Address Book to manage your contacts, and you use iCal to enter and track appointments and to-do items.

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:39 PM

Page 213

Open and Close Address Book ....................214 Add a New Contact ..........................................216 Edit a Contact ....................................................218 Create a Contact Group ..................................220 Open and Close iCal ........................................222 Navigate the Calendar ....................................224 Create an Appointment ..................................226 Create a Repeating Appointment ................228 Create a To-Do Item ........................................230

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:39 PM

Page 214

Open and Close Address Book

ss e r d Ad k Boo

Your Mac includes the Address Book application to enable you to manage your contacts, whether they are colleagues, friends, or family members. Before you can add or work with contacts, you must know how to start the Address Book application.

Open and Close Address Book OPEN ADDRESS BOOK

1 Click the Finder icon ( ) in the

3

Dock.

2 Click Applications. 3 Double-click Address Book.

2

1 The Address Book window appears.

214

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:40 PM

Page 215

Working with Contacts and Appointments CLOSE ADDRESS BOOK

10

chapter

1

1 Click Address Book.

2 Click Quit Address Book.

2

Are there faster methods I can use to close Address Book?

SHORT CUT

The fastest way to start Address Book is to click ress the Address Book icon Add k oo B ( ) in the Dock. If you have used Address Book recently, another reasonably fast method is to click , click Recent Items, and then click Address Book.

Probably the fastest method you can use to quit Address Book is to +click or right-click and then click Quit. If your hands are closer to the keyboard than to the mouse, you can quit Address Book by pressing +

SHORT CUT

Add Book ress

Are there faster methods I can use to open Address Book?

.

215

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:40 PM

Page 216

Add a New Contact er ag nk an Ba M d ois ch woo Illin n a n , Br tto ville Co ren G olf

eR

n An

You can store contact information for a particular person by creating a card for that person in Address Book. You can store a person’s name, company name, phone numbers, address, and much more.

Beth Hu

mphry Produc tio Superv n iso Keyline r Pr Adobe, inters Californi a

y ilfo rt G

e Rob

Dennis Wa

gner Staff Psyc ho Haven Hi logist lls Louisville, Kentucky

t ran stau ner Ow our Re Tower La T olving irginia V v , 1 Re sburg Hap

Add a New Contact

1

1 Click File. 2 Click New Card.

2

Note: You can also run the New Card command in the by pressing + or by clicking Name column.

l Address Book adds a new card.

3 Use the First field to type the

3

contact’s first name.

6

4 Use the Last field to type the contact’s last name.

5 Use the Company field to type the contact’s company name.

6 If the contact is a company, click Company (

216

changes to

).

4

5

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:40 PM

Page 217

Working with Contacts and Appointments

10

chapter

7 In the first Phone field, click and then click the category you want to use.

7

8 Type the phone number. 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to enter

8

data in some or all of the other fields.

Note: See the next section to learn how to add more fields to the card.

0 Click Edit. Address Book saves the new card.

0

If I include a contact’s e-mail address, is there a way to send that person a message without having to type the address? Yes. You can follow these steps:

1 2 3

2

3

Click the e-mail address category. Click Send Email.

Apple Mail displays a new e-mail message with the contact already added in the To line.

4

1

Click the contact’s card.

Fill in the rest of the message as required.

5

Click Send.

Note, too, that you can also start a new message in Mail: click Address, click the contact, and then click To: (or Cc: or Bcc:).

217

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:40 PM

Page 218

Edit a Contact If you need to make changes to the information already in a contact’s card, or if you need to add new information to a card, you can edit the card from within Address Book.

r Carte

Rolf er nag Ma d Bank nch o Bra onwo linois Il Cott ville, n Gre

e Ann

Beth Hu

mphry

Produc tio Superv n iso Keyline r Pr Adobe, inters Californi a

ert

Rob

y Gilfo

t ran stau ner Ow our Re Tower La T olving irginia V v , e 1 R sburg Hap

Dennis Wa

gner Staff Psyc ho Haven Hi logist lls Louisville, Kentucky

Edit a Contact

1 Click the card you want to edit. 2 Click Edit.

1

2 l Address Book makes the card’s fields available for editing.

3 Edit the existing fields as required.

4 To add a field, click

4

.

Note: Address Book adds a field of the same type. For example, if you click in the Phone area, Address Book adds a new Phone field.

5 To remove a field, click

218

.

3 5

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:40 PM

Page 219

Working with Contacts and Appointments

6 To add a new field type, click

10

chapter

6

Card.

7 Click Add Field. 8 Click the type of field you want.

7

8

l Address Book adds the field to the card.

9 When you are done, click Edit. Address Book saves the edited card.

9

How do I add a picture for the new contact? Follow these steps:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Click the contact’s card. Click Edit and double-click the picture box.

5

1

Click Choose and choose the picture you want to use. Click Open. Click and drag the picture to the position you want. Click Set.

3

6 2

7

Click Edit.

219

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:40 PM

Page 220

Create a Contact Group You can organize your contacts into one or more groups, which is useful if you want to view just a subset of your contacts. You can create a group first and then add members, or you can select members in advance and then create the group.

Create a Contact Group

1

CREATE A CONTACT GROUP

1 Click File. 2 Click New Group.

2

Note: You can also run the New Group command + + or by clicking in by pressing the Group column.

l Address Book adds a new group.

3 4 5 6

Type a name for the group. Press

5

.

Click All. Click and drag a contact to the group. Address Book adds the contact to the group.

7 Repeat Step 6 for the other contacts you want to add to the group.

220

3 6

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:40 PM

Page 221

Working with Contacts and Appointments

10

chapter

CREATE A GROUP OF SELECTED CONTACTS

1 Select the contacts you want to include in the new group. Note: To select multiple contacts, press and hold and click each card.

2 Click File. 3 Click New Group From

1 1 1

2 3

Selection.

l Address Book adds a new group. l Address Book adds the selected contacts as group members.

4 Type a name for the group. 5 Press .

Can I send an e-mail message to the group? Yes, this is one of the best reasons to To: create a group. Normally, sending an Club Book e-mail message to multiple contacts involves typing or selecting multiple addresses. With a group, however, you send a single message to the group, and Mail automatically sends a copy to each member. +click or right-click the group and then click Send Email to “Group”, where Group is the name of the group.

4

What is a smart group? A smart group is a special group where each member has one or Smart Group more fields in common, such as the company name, department name, city, or state. When you create the smart group, you specify one or more criteria, and then Address Book automatically adds members to the group if they meet those criteria. To create a smart group, click File, click New Smart Group, and then enter your group criteria. *Choose members who:

Are employed by Wiley Publishing Work in art dept.

Live in Indianapolis

221

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:40 PM

Page 222

Open and Close iCal

iCal

Your Mac includes the iCal application to enable you to manage your schedule. Before you can add or work with events (appointments and all-day activities), and to-do items (tasks), you must know how to start the iCal application.

200 8

Open and Close iCal OPEN ICAL

1 Click in the Dock. 2 Click Applications. 3 Double-click iCal.

3 2

1 The iCal window appears.

222

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:40 PM

Page 223

Working with Contacts and Appointments CLOSE ICAL

10

chapter

1

1 Click iCal.

2 Click Quit iCal.

2

Are there faster methods I can use to open iCal? The fastest way to start iCal is to click the iCal icon ( ) in the Dock. If you have used iCal recently, another reasonably fast method is to click , click Recent Items, and then click iCal.

Are there faster methods I can use to close iCal?

SHORT CUT

Probably the fastest method you can use to quit iCal is to +click or right-click and then click Quit. If your hands are closer to the keyboard than to the mouse, you can quit iCal by + . pressing

SHORT CUT

iCal 223

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:40 PM

Page 224

Navigate the Calendar

Thu

y

2

8

1

Su

nda y

Mo nda y

Tu e sda y

We

dne

sda

Jun e2

rsd ay

Frid ay

00 3 9 1 4 8 15 0 1 5 1 6 22 2 6 17 18 1 12 1 7 3 29 3 3 24 25 19 20 14 0 26 2 21 7 28

Sa tu r

day

Before you create an appointment or all-day event, you must first select the date on which the appointment or event occurs.

Navigate the Calendar USE THE MINI-MONTH

1 In the mini-month, click the Next Month button ( ) until the month of your appointment appears. l If you go too far, click the Previous Month button ( ) to move back to the month you want.

1

2 Click the date. l The date appears in the appointments list. l To see just that date, click Day (or press + ). l To see the date in the context of its month, click Month (or press + ). l If you want to return to today’s date, click Today (or press + ).

2

224

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:40 PM

Page 225

10

chapter

Working with Contacts and Appointments GO TO A SPECIFIC DATE

1

1 Click View. 2 Click Go to Date. You can also select the Go to Date command by + + . pressing

2

3 The Go to date dialog box appears.

4

3 Use the Date text box to type the date you want using the format mm/dd/yyyy. l You can also click the day, month, or year and then click to increase or decrease the value.

4 Click Show. iCal displays the date in the appointments list.

In the Week view, the week begins on Sunday. How can I change this to Monday? iCal’s default Week view has Sunday on the left and Saturday on the right. Many people prefer to display the weekend days together, with Monday on the left signaling the start of the week. To set this up, follow these steps:

1 2 3 4

Click iCal in the menu bar.

5

Click

5

3 4

Click Preferences. Click the General tab. In the Start week on pop-up menu, click click Monday.

and then

.

225

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:40 PM

Page 226

Create an Appointment

ay nd Su

You can help organize your life by using iCal to record your appointments — which iCal calls events — on the date and time they occur.

y da on

M

6 08 20 5 ne Ju 3 4 12 1 2 0 1 1 9 1 7 18 8 16 1 4 2 ay esd Tu

y

y da urs

Th

ete tP ee the M at ch a be

sda dn e We

If the event has no set time — for example, a birthday, anniversary, or multiple-day event such as a sales meeting or vacation — you can create an all-day appointment.

y ida Fr

Create an Appointment CREATE A REGULAR APPOINTMENT

1 Navigate to the date when the

1

2

appointment occurs.

2 Click the calendar you want to use.

3 Double-click the time when the

3

appointment starts. l iCal adds a one-hour appointment. Note: If the appointment is less than or more than an hour, you can also click and drag the mouse ( ) over the full appointment period.

4 Type the name of the event. 5 Press . Note: Another way to create a new appointment is to click the start time and then press + .

4

226

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:40 PM

Page 227

Working with Contacts and Appointments CREATE AN ALL-DAY APPOINTMENT

1 Navigate to the date when the appointment occurs.

10

chapter 1

3

2

2 Click the calendar you want to use.

3 Double-click anywhere inside the all-day section. l iCal adds a new all-day appointment.

4 Type the name of the event. 5 Press .

4

How can I specify event details such as the location and a reminder message?

4

Use the location text box to type the location of the event.

Follow these steps:

5

Use the alarm pop-up menu to choose Message.

6

Choose the amount of time before the appointment that you want to receive the reminder.

7

Click Done.

1 2

Follow the steps in this section to create an appointment. Double-click the appointment. If this is the first time you have edited the appointment, skip to Step 4.

3

Click Edit.

iCal saves the new appointment configuration.

4

5 6

7

227

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:40 PM

Page 228

Create a Repeating Appointment

y sda dne ting We s Mee ) u ts Stat repea (

If you have an activity or appointment that recurs at a regular interval, you can create an event and configure it to automatically repeat in iCal. You can repeat an event daily, weekly, monthly, yearly, or with a custom interval.

y da tur Sa

3

7

4

5

15

8

1

2

y

6

22 16 1 11 29 23 24 7 18 12 1 30 25 19 2 3 14 26 0 2 27 1 28

20 08 y da on

sda dne We

ay

10

M ay

nd

Su

ay esd

urs Th

9

Ju

ne

y da

Tu

Frid

Create a Repeating Appointment

1 Follow the steps in the previous section to create an appointment.

2

2 Double-click the appointment.

iCal displays information for the event. Note: You do not see this information the first time you double-click an appointment, in which case you can skip to Step 4.

3 Click Edit.

228

3

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:40 PM

Page 229

Working with Contacts and Appointments

10

chapter

iCal opens the appointment for editing.

4 Beside the repeat label, click None.

4

5 Click the interval you want to use. l If you want to specify a custom interval such as every two weeks or the first Monday of every month, click Custom and configure your interval in the dialog box that appears.

5

6 Click Done. iCal adds the repeating appointments to the calendar.

6

Is it possible to delete just a single occurrence out of a recurring series of events?

How do I configure an event to stop after a certain number of occurrences? Follow these steps:

1

Follow Steps 1 to 5 to select a recurrence interval.

2

Beside the end label, click None and then click After.

3

Type the number of occurrences you want.

4

Click Done.

2

3 4

Yes, you can delete one occurrence from the calendar without affecting the rest of the series. Click the occurrence you want to delete, and then press Del . iCal asks whether you want to delete all the occurrences or just the selected occurrence. Click Delete Only This Event.

229

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:40 PM

Page 230

Create a To-Do Item You can monitor to-do items — from large projects such as budgets to basic chores such as returning phone calls — by using iCal to record these tasks. You can help organize your life by giving a priority to each task.

to d w ch

7 6 4 3 1 3 2 1 1 1 2 0 1

S M taf @ ee f 9A tin M g

y ursda h T y sda tto do: Wedne pick up y a d Albert Tues @ airport tist Den ed W on 0AM @1

When the to-do item is done, you should mark it as complete so you can easily tell which items remain to be done. Create a To-Do Item

lun ren @ fé Ka o Ca m Cos

@ 6AM

to do:

w dinnereses n the Jo pm @7

2

CREATE A TO-DO ITEM

3

1 Click the calendar you want to use.

d Saturo:

Friday

1

2 Click File. 3 Click New To Do. Note: You can also choose the New To Do command by pressing + .

l iCal displays the To Do list. l iCal adds a new to-do item to the list. l You can click View or Hide To Dos ( ) to toggle the To Do list on and off.

4 Type the name of the to-do item. 5 Press .

230

4

13_384688-ch10.qxp

9/5/08

7:40 PM

Page 231

Working with Contacts and Appointments

10

chapter

SET THE PRIORITY

1

1 Click the Set Priority icon ( ). 2 Click the priority you want to use.

2

MARK A TO DO ITEM AS COMPLETED

1

1 Click the Completed check box (

changes to

).

How can I specify to-do item details such as the due date and a reminder message?

3

Follow these steps:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4

Follow the steps in this section to create a to-do item. In the To Do list, double-click the to-do item. Click due date (

changes to

7

6

5

).

Type the date the to-do item is due. Use the alarm pop-up menu to choose Message.

8

Choose when you want to receive the reminder. Type the time you want the reminder to appear. Click Done.

iCal saves the new to-do item configuration.

231

14_384688-ch11.qxp

9/5/08

7:47 PM

Page 232

chapter

11

Working with Your MobileMe Account Finder File Edit View G Go o Window nd He Help p

cts Conta

Mon 12:00 PM

Appointments

iDisk

MobileMe Sync

Sharing Photos

For an annual fee, you can get a MobileMe account, which is a Web-based service that gives you e-mail, an address book, a calendar, a Web Gallery for sharing photos, and online file storage. This chapter shows you how to use all of these features of MobileMe.

14_384688-ch11.qxp

9/5/08

7:47 PM

Page 233

Log in to MobileMe ..........................................234 Send and Receive MobileMe Mail................236 Work with MobileMe Contacts......................238 Manage Your Schedule with MobileMe......240 Share Photos with MobileMe........................242 Upload Files to Your iDisk..............................244 Synchronize Your Mac with MobileMe ......246

14_384688-ch11.qxp

9/5/08

7:47 PM

Page 234

Log in to MobileMe Finder File Edit View Go Window Help

Mon 12:00 PM

Before you can use any of the features associated with your MobileMe account, you must log in to the service. nk

cla

Log in to MobileMe

1

1 In your Web browser, type http://www.me.com/.

2 Press

.

The MobileMe Login page appears.

3 Use the Member name text box to type your MobileMe ID, which is your member name followed by @me.com.

4 Use the Password text box to type the password for your MobileMe account.

234

4

3

cli nk

14_384688-ch11.qxp

9/5/08

7:47 PM

Page 235

11

chapter

Working with Your MobileMe Account l If you want MobileMe to log you in automatically for two weeks, click Keep me logged in for two weeks ( changes to ).

5 Click Log In.

5

Your main MobileMe account page appears. l When you are done working with your MobileMe account, click Log Out to log out of the account.

How do I get a MobileMe account?

Can I log in from my Mac?

Follow Steps 1 and 2, click sign Free ! Trial Oﬀer up for a free trial, and then fill in the form. You will be able to try out MobileMe free for 60 days, and then to continue you must pay a subscription fee. A Basic Membership currently costs $99 per year; a Family Pack membership currently costs $149 per year and consists of one main account plus four subaccounts.

Yes. Click the System Preferences Icon ( ) in the Dock (or click and then click System Preferences) and then click MobileMe. (If you see .Mac instead, click , click Software Update, and then install the Mac OS X Update for MobileMe.) Type your member name and password, and then click Sign In.

235

14_384688-ch11.qxp

9/5/08

7:47 PM

Page 236

Send and Receive MobileMe Mail You can use the MobileMe Mail feature to work with your MobileMe e-mail account online. You can check for incoming messages, reply to messages, or send new messages, using either your Mac or any computer with Web access.

Send and Receive MobileMe Mail DISPLAY MOBILEME MAIL

2

1 Log in to your MobileMe account. Note: See the “Log in to MobileMe” section, earlier in this chapter.

2 Click Mail.

GET INCOMING MESSAGES

1 Click Get Mail. MobileMe Mail checks for incoming messages and, if there are any, it displays them in the Inbox folder.

236

1

14_384688-ch11.qxp

9/5/08

7:47 PM

Page 237

Working with Your MobileMe Account REPLY TO A MESSAGE

1 Click the message. 2 Click Reply to sender.

11

chapter

2 1

l To reply to all the recipients of the original message, click Reply to all recipients instead. l To pass the message to another person, click Forward instead.

3 In the message window that appears (not shown), type your message and then click Send message. SEND A NEW MESSAGE

1 Click Compose new message.

1

The New Message window appears.

2 Use the To text box to type the recipient’s e-mail address. l If you want another person to see a copy of the message, type that person’s address in the Cc text box.

3 Use the Subject text box to type the subject of the message.

5

4 Type your message. 5 Click Send message.

2 3 4

I am receiving spam on my MobileMe e-mail account. Can MobileMe Mail block these messages?

K JUN Yes, MobileMe Mail comes with a junkmail filter feature that marks spam messages as junk and optionally moves those messages to the Junk folder. To activate this feature, open MobileMe Mail, click , click Preferences, and then click the General tab. Click Enable junk mail filtering ( changes to ). To use the Junk folder, also click the Automatically move messages marked as junk to the Junk folder check box ( changes to ). Click Save.

Can I use MobileMe Mail to check e-mail from another account?

Mob AccoileMe unt

POP Accou nt

Yes, MobileMe Mail allows you to check incoming mail on one POP (Post Office Protocol) account, such as your ISP account. Open MobileMe Mail, click , click Preferences, and then click the Other tab. Click Check mail from an external POP account ( changes to ), and then fill in your e-mail address, User name, Password, and Incoming mail server address. Click Save.

237

14_384688-ch11.qxp

9/5/08

7:48 PM

Page 238

Work with MobileMe Contacts You can use MobileMe to store information about your friends, family, colleagues, and clients. Using the Contacts application, you can store data such as the person’s name, phone numbers, e-mail address, and street address.

Mobil AddreseMe s Book

If you already have contacts in your Mac Address Book, you can synchronize them with MobileMe. See “Synchronize Your Mac with MobileMe,” later in this chapter. Work with MobileMe Contacts DISPLAY MOBILEME CONTACTS

1 Log in to your MobileMe account. Note: See the “Log in to MobileMe” section, earlier in this chapter.

2 Click Contacts.

CREATE A CONTACT

1 2 3 4 5

2

1

Click Create a new contact.

4

Type the person’s first name.

5

Type the person’s last name. Type the person company name. Click here and then click a phone number category.

6 Type the phone number. 7 Click here and then click an e-mail category.

8 Type the person’s e-mail address.

238

7

2

3

6 8

14_384688-ch11.qxp

9/5/08

7:48 PM

Page 239

Working with Your MobileMe Account

11

chapter

9 Click here and then click a street address category.

9

0 Use the text boxes in this section

0

to type the person’s street address.

!

! Type a note about the person. @ Click Save.

@

MobileMe saves the contact. DISPLAY A CONTACT

1 Use the scroll bar to locate the contact.

2 Click the contact. l MobileMe displays the contact’s details.

2

l You can also type part of the contact’s name in the Search box. l To e-mail the contact, click the email address.

1

l To make changes to the contact, click Edit. l To remove the contact, click Delete.

How do I add a photo for a contact? To add a photo to an existing contact, click the contact and then click Edit. Click Add to open the Add Photo dialog box, click Choose Photo, click the photo you want to use, click Choose, and then click OK. Note that you can only use GIF, JPEG, or PNG files that are no larger than 1MB.

Is there any way to store data such as the person’s birthday or job title? Yes, the Contacts application offers a number of other fields, including Happy B irthday Birthday, Job Title, Nickname, Prefix, ! and Suffix. To add a field to an existing contact, click the contact and then click Edit. Click Add Field, click the field you want, and then edit the field data. Note, too, that you can also add more instances of some fields by clicking the green + icon to the right of a field.

239

14_384688-ch11.qxp

9/5/08

7:48 PM

Page 240

Manage Your Schedule with MobileMe You can use MobileMe to manage your schedule. Using the Calendar application, you can add events (appointments and all-day activities) and to-do items (tasks). If you already have appointments in your Mac iCal application, you can synchronize them with MobileMe. See “Synchronize Your Mac with MobileMe,” later in this chapter. Manage Your Schedule with MobileMe DISPLAY MOBILEME CALENDAR

1 Log in to your MobileMe account. Note: See the “Log in to MobileMe” section, earlier in this chapter.

2

2 Click Calendar.

NAVIGATE CALENDAR

1 Click Next Month ( ) until the month you want appears. l Click Previous Month ( ) to move back to the month you want.

1

2 Click the date. l To see just that date, click Day. l To see the date in the context of its week, click Week. l To see the date in the context of its month, click Month. l To return to today’s date, click Today.

240

2

14_384688-ch11.qxp

9/5/08

7:48 PM

Page 241

11

chapter

Working with Your MobileMe Account CREATE AN EVENT

1 Navigate to the date when the

2

appointment occurs.

2 Click the calendar you want to use. 3 Double-click the time when the

3

event starts. l Calendar adds a one-hour event.

1 4

Note: If the event is less than or more than an hour, you can also click and drag the mouse ( ) over the full appointment period.

4 Type the name of the event. 5 Press . EDIT AN EVENT

1 Double-click the event. 1

2 Edit the event details as needed. l If the event lasts all day, click AllDay Event ( changes to ).

2

3 Click OK. 3

How do I create a to-do item?

TO DO Click and then click New To Do. MobileMe Call Karen displays the To Dos by Pick up milk Priority list and adds a new Return books to-do item. Type the to-do Wash car item text and then press . To change the priority, click the Priority button in the right of the to-do item and the click None, Low, Medium, or High.

How do I change the time zone? Click and the click Preferences to open the Calendar Preferences. Click the Advanced tab and then click Turn on time zone support ( changes to ). Click the Time zone menu and then click the time zone you want to use. Click Save. MobileMe reloads and displays the new time zone in the browser’s title bar.

241

14_384688-ch11.qxp

9/5/08

7:48 PM

Page 242

Share Photos with MobileMe You can use MobileMe to upload photos and share them with others. Using the Gallery application, you can create different photo albums and make those albums available for others to see. You can also configure a photo album to allow others to upload and download photos. Share Photos with MobileMe CREATE A PHOTO ALBUM

1 Log in to your MobileMe account. Note: See the “Log in to MobileMe” section, earlier in this chapter.

2

2 Click Gallery. 3 Click Create a New Album.

3

4 Type the album name. 5 To allow Web uploading, click 6

Uploading of photos via web browser ( changes to ).

5

7

4

6 To allow e-mail uploading, click Adding of photos via email or iPhone ( changes to ).

7 To allow downloading, click Downloading of photos or entire album ( changes to

8 Click Create.

242

).

8

14_384688-ch11.qxp

9/5/08

7:48 PM

Page 243

Working with Your MobileMe Account UPLOAD PHOTOS

11

chapter

2

1 Click the album. 2 Click Upload.

1

The Uploads window appears.

3 Click Close this window when complete (

changes to

).

4 Click Choose.

3

4

5 Select the photos you want to upload.

6 Click Select. 5

MobileMe uploads the photos to the album.

6

Can I upload photos to an album using my iPhone?

How do people view my MobileMe Gallery?

Sure, as long as you’re using the iPhone 2.0 software. On your iPhone’s Home screen, tap Photos, tap the photo album that contains the photo you want to upload, tap the photo, tap the Action icon in the lower-left corner, and then tap Send to MobileMe. Tap the album you want to use for the photo. In the new e-mail message, type a photo title in the Subject field and then tap Send. 9:41 AM

People can view your MobileMe Gallery using any Web browser. The address of your gallery is shown in the upper-right corner of the Gallery application. The format is http://gallery.me.com/Username, where Username is your MobileMe username.

243

14_384688-ch11.qxp

9/5/08

7:48 PM

Page 244

Upload Files to Your iDisk rm Info

You can store files with your MobileMe account by using the iDisk online storage feature. With iDisk, you upload files from your Mac and store them in iDisk folders such as Pictures, Documents, and Backup.

at io

n

rm Info

at io

n

You can use iDisk to make backup copies of important documents. Because you can access your iDisk from any computer over the Web, you can also use iDisk to make certain files available to you from anywhere that has Internet access. Upload Files to Your iDisk DISPLAY MOBILEME IDISK

1 Log in to your MobileMe account. 2

Note: See the “Log in to MobileMe” section, earlier in this chapter.

2 Click iDisk.

UPLOAD A FILE USING MOBILEME

2

1 Click the folder you want to use to store the file.

2 Click Upload.

1

The Uploads window appears.

3 Click Close this window when complete (

4 Click Choose.

244

changes to

).

3

4

14_384688-ch11.qxp

9/5/08

7:48 PM

Page 245

Working with Your MobileMe Account

11

chapter

5 Select the file you want to upload. 6 Click Select. MobileMe uploads the file to your iDisk.

5 2

UPLOAD A FILE USING YOUR MAC

1 Click the Finder icon ( ). 2 Click iDisk. 3 Click the folder to which you

3

6

want to upload the file.

4 Press

+

.

1 A new Finder window appears.

5 Open the folder that contains the

6

file you want to upload.

6 Click and drag the file and drop it inside the iDisk folder.

5

Your Mac uploads the file to your iDisk. You can now access your uploaded files online.

Can I access my iDisk from Windows?

Can I use iDisk to share files with other people over the Web?

iDisk

Yes, if you also have a Windows computer at home or at work, you can use it to access your iDisk. Open a Web browser and enter the address http://idisk.mac.com/ username/, where username is your MobileMe member name. When Windows asks you to log on, type your MobileMe member name and password, and then click OK.

Yes, you can use the Public folder to ic do this. Other people can then use a Publ Web browser to enter the address http://public.me.com/username/, where username is your MobileMe member name. No password is required, so others can easily work with these files. Because the Public folder does not require a password, do not use it to store files that contain confidential or sensitive data.

245

14_384688-ch11.qxp

9/5/08

7:48 PM

Page 246

Synchronize Your Mac with MobileMe You can ensure that your Mac and your MobileMe account have the same data by synchronizing the two. You can synchronize bookmarks, iCal appointments, Address Book contacts, e-mail accounts, and more. If you have a second Mac, you can also synchronize it with the same MobileMe account, which ensures that your two Macs use the same data. Synchronize Your Mac with MobileMe

1 Log in to your MobileMe account. 2 Note: See the “Log in to MobileMe” section, earlier in this chapter.

2 Click the Apple Icon ( ). 3 Click System Preferences.

3

Note: You can also open System Preferences by clicking on the Dock.

The System Preferences window appears.

4 Click MobileMe.

4

246

MobileMe Account nize

Synchro

Synchronizing .. in progress .

14_384688-ch11.qxp

9/5/08

7:48 PM

Page 247

Working with Your MobileMe Account The MobileMe preferences appear.

5

5 Click Sync. 6 Click Synchronize with MobileMe (

changes to

11

chapter

6

).

l Your Mac registers itself with your MobileMe account.

7 Click the check box beside each type of data you want to synchronize ( changes to

).

8 Click Sync Now.

8

Your Mac synchronizes the data with your MobileMe account.

7

Is there a way to have my Mac synchronize with my MobileMe account on a schedule?

9

What happens if I modify an appointment, contact, bookmark, or other data in MobileMe?

at

:00

at 3:30 8:00

9

3:30 8 The synchronization process works both ways. That is, all the Mac data you selected to synchronize is sent to your MobileMe account. However, the data on your MobileMe account is also sent to your Mac. This means that if you modify, add, or delete data on your MobileMe account, those changes are also reflected in your Mac data. at 3:30 8:00

at 3:30 8:00

at 3:30 8:00

19

29

Yes, you can configure your MobileMe preferences to perform an automatic synchronization at regular intervals. Follow Steps 1 to 6 to enable the synchronization. In the Synchronize with MobileMe list, click and then click the interval you want: Every Hour, Every Day, or Every Week.

19

29

at 3:30 8:00

247

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:54 PM

Page 248

chapter

12

Customizing Your Mac Your Mac comes with a number of features that enable you to customize your computer. Not only can you change the appearance of your Mac to suit your taste, but you can also change the way your Mac works to make it easier to use and more efficient.

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:54 PM

Page 249

Display System Preferences ..........................250 Change the Desktop Background ................252 Activate the Screen Saver ..............................254 Set Your Mac’s Sleep Options ......................256 Change the Display Resolution ....................258 Change Your Mac’s Name ..............................260 Customize the Dock ........................................262 Add an Icon to the Dock ................................264 Hide the Dock....................................................266 Add a Widget to the Dashboard ..................268

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:54 PM

Page 250

Display System Preferences SYSTEM PREFERENCES

1 Click the Apple Icon ( ). 2 Click System Preferences.

The System Preferences window appears.

250

2

TWOR K

NE

PE R

1

HAR

R DWA E

IN TERN ET

Display System Preferences OPEN SYSTEM PREFERENCES

AL SON

ING

You can find many of your Mac’s customization features in System Preferences, a collection of settings and options that control the overall look and operation of your Mac. To use these settings, you must know how to display the System Preferences window.

TE M SYS

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:54 PM

Page 251

Customizing Your Mac CLOSE SYSTEM PREFERENCES

12

chapter

1

1 Click System Preferences.

2 Click Quit System Preferences.

2

Are there faster methods I can use to open and close System Preferences? The fastest way to start System Preferences is to click the System Preferences icon ( ) in the Dock. Probably the fastest method you can use to quit System Preferences is to click . Alternatively, +click or right-click and then click Quit. Finally, if your hands are closer to the keyboard than to the mouse, you can quit System Preferences by pressing + .

Sometimes when I open System Preferences I do not see all the icons. How can I restore the original icons? When you click an icon in System Preferences, the window changes to show just the options and settings associated with that icon. To return to the main System Preferences window, you have two choices:

l Click

until the main window appears.

l Click Show All.

251

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:54 PM

Page 252

Change the Desktop Background To give your Mac a different look, you can change the desktop background to display either a different image or a solid color. You can change the desktop background to show either a fixed image or a series of images that change periodically. Change the Desktop Background SET A FIXED BACKGROUND IMAGE

1 Open System Preferences.

2

Note: See the “Display System Preferences” section, earlier in this chapter.

2 Click Desktop & Screen Saver.

The desktop and screen saver preferences appear.

3

3 Click Desktop. 4 Click the image category you want to use.

4

252

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:54 PM

Page 253

Customizing Your Mac

12

chapter

5 Click the image you want to use as the desktop background. Your Mac changes the desktop background.

6

6 If you chose a photo in Step 5, click

and then click an item to determine how your Mac displays the photo.

5 SET A CHANGING BACKGROUND IMAGE

1 Click Change picture ( changes to ). 2 Click in the list and then click how often you want the background image to change.

3 If you want your Mac to choose the periodic image randomly, click Random order ( changes to ). Your Mac changes the desktop background periodically based on your chosen interval.

3

1

2

When I choose a photo, what is the difference between the various options for displaying the photo? Your Mac gives you five options for displaying the photo: Fit to Screen This option expands the photo in all four directions until the photo is either the same height as the desktop or the same width as the desktop. Fill Screen This option expands the photo by the same amount in all four directions until it fills the entire desktop. This option can cause some edges of the photo to be cropped out.

Stretch to Fill Screen This option expands the photo in all four directions until it fills the entire desktop. Because the photo is usually expanded more either vertically or horizontally, this option can cause the photo to appear distorted. Tile This option repeats your photo multiple times to fill the entire desktop. Center This option displays the photo at its actual size and places the photo in the center of the desktop.

253

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:54 PM

Page 254

Activate the Screen Saver

Screen Saver Mode

You can set up your Mac to display a screen saver, a moving pattern or series of pictures. The screen saver appears after your computer has been idle for a while. If you leave your monitor on for long stretches while your computer is idle, a faint version of the unmoving image can endure for awhile on the screen, a phenomenon known as persistence. A screen saver prevents this by displaying a moving image.

Activate the Screen Saver

1 Open System Preferences. Note: See the “Display System Preferences” section, earlier in this chapter.

2

2 Click Desktop & Screen Saver.

The desktop and screen saver preferences appear.

3

3 Click Screen Saver. 4 Click the screen saver you want to use.

4

254

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:54 PM

Page 255

Customizing Your Mac

12

chapter

l A preview of the screen saver appears here.

5 Click and drag the Start screen saver slider ( ) to set when the screen saver begins. Note: The interval you choose is the number of minutes or hours that your Mac must be idle before the screen saver starts.

l If the screen saver is customizable, click Options to configure it.

5

l If you also want to see the current time when the screen saver is active, click Show with clock ( changes to ). l If you want to see a different screen saver each time, click Use random screen saver ( changes to ).

What are hot corners and how do I configure them? A hot corner is a corner of your Mac’s screen that you have set up to perform some action when you move the mouse ( ) to that corner. To configure hot corners, follow these steps:

1 2

Click and then click the action you want to perform when you move to the top-right corner of the screen.

5

Click and then click the action you want to perform when you move to the bottom-left corner of the screen.

6

Click and then click the action you want to perform when you move to the bottom-right corner of the screen.

7

Click OK.

Follow Steps 1 to 4 to select a screen saver. Click Hot Corners.

System Preferences displays the Active Screen Corners dialog box.

3

4

In the top-left pop-up menu, click and then click the action you want to perform when you move to the top-left corner of the screen.

4 6

3 5 7

255

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:54 PM

Page 256

Set Your Mac’s Sleep Options You can make your Mac more energy efficient by putting the display or the entire computer to sleep after a period of inactivity. Sleep mode means that your display or your Mac is in a temporary low-power mode. This saves energy on all Macs, and also saves battery power on a notebook Mac. Set Your Mac’s Sleep Options

1 Open System Preferences. Note: See the “Display System Preferences” section, earlier in this chapter.

2 Click Energy Saver.

2

The Energy Saver preferences appear.

3 With a notebook Mac, use the Settings for pop-up menu to click and then click either Power Adapter or Battery.

4 With a notebook Mac, use the Optimization pop-up menu to click and then click one of the energy settings.

256

3 4

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:54 PM

Page 257

Customizing Your Mac

12

chapter

5 If you want to specify custom settings, click Show Details.

5

The Energy Saver preferences window expands to show the sleep settings.

6 Click Sleep. 7 Click and drag

to set the computer sleep timer. This specifies the period of inactivity after which your computer goes to sleep.

6 7

8 Click and drag

to set the display sleep timer.

8

This specifies the period of inactivity after which your display goes to sleep.

How do I wake up a sleeping display or computer?

What is the difference between the various energy settings in the Optimization pop-up menu?

If your Mac’s display is in sleep mode, you can wake up the display either by moving your mouse or by pressing any key on your keyboard. If your entire Mac is in sleep mode, you wake up the computer either by clicking the mouse or by pressing any key on your keyboard.

Saving energy with a computer is always a tradeoff: the more energy you save, the poorer the computer’s performance (because you must wait for devices to wake up). The Better Energy Savings and Better Battery Life items put the display and computer to sleep faster than the Better Performance item. The Normal item uses settings in between these two extremes.

257

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:55 PM

Page 258

Change the Display Resolution You can change the resolution of your Mac’s display. This enables you to adjust the display for best viewing or for maximum compatibility with whatever application you are using. You can change your Mac’s display resolution using either the System Preferences window or the menu bar. Change the Display Resolution CHANGE RESOLUTION VIA THE DISPLAY PREFERENCES

1 Open System Preferences. Note: See the “Display System Preferences” section, earlier in this chapter.

2 Click Displays.

2

The displays preferences appear.

3 Click Display. 4 Click the resolution you want to

3

use. Your Mac adjusts the screen to the new resolution. l To change the resolution using your Mac’s menu bar, as described on the next page, click Show displays in menu bar ( changes to ).

258

4

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:55 PM

Page 259

Customizing Your Mac CHANGE RESOLUTION VIA THE MENU BAR

12

chapter

1

1 Click the Displays icon ( ).

Your Mac opens a menu that shows the three most-recently used resolutions.

2

l The resolution with the check mark ( ) is the current resolution.

2 Click the resolution you want to use. Your Mac adjusts the screen to the new resolution.

What do the resolution numbers mean?

Why do some resolutions also include the word “stretched”?

The resolution numbers are 1024 expressed in pixels, short for picture elements, which are 768 the individual dots that make up what you see on your Mac’s screen. The pixels are arranged in rows and columns, and the resolution tells you the number of pixels that are in each row and column. So a resolution of 1024 x 768 means that the display is using 1,024-pixel rows and 768-pixel columns.

Most older displays are made with the ratio of the width to the height — this STRETCHED is called the aspect ratio — set at 4:3. However, most new Mac displays are made with an aspect ratio of 16:10, which is called widescreen. Resolutions designed for 4:3 displays — such as 800 x 600 and 1024 x 768 — take up only part of a widescreen display. To make them take up the entire display, choose the stretched version of the resolution.

259

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:55 PM

Page 260

Change Your Mac’s Name HELLO! MY NAME

You can give your Mac a distinctive or easier name. By default, your Mac’s computer name is your name followed by ’s Mac — for example, Karen Hammond’s Mac.

IS

mond’s Ma

Karen Ham

Karen’s iMac

You can also change your Mac’s network name, which is the computer name with spaces replaced with hyphens (-), other symbols removed, and .local added — for example, Karen-Hammonds-Mac.local. Change Your Mac’s Name CHANGE YOUR MAC’S COMPUTER NAME

1 Open System Preferences. Note: See the “Display System Preferences” section, earlier in this chapter.

2 Click Sharing. 2

The Sharing preferences appear.

3 Use the Computer Name text box to type the name you want to use.

4 Press

.

Your Mac sets the new computer name.

260

3

c

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:55 PM

Page 261

Customizing Your Mac

12

chapter

CHANGE YOUR MAC’S NETWORK NAME

5 Click Edit. 5

6 Use the Local Hostname text box to type the network name you want to use. Note: You cannot edit the .local part of the network name.

6

7 Click OK.

7

Your Mac sets the new network name.

Are there any restrictions on the computer name or network name?

Why should I change my Mac’s computer or network name?

HELLO! MY NAME

IS

n

Less tha Yes. The computer name characters 64 must be 63 characters or less and can include any character except at (@), equals (=), and colon (:). The network name must be 63 characters or less and it can use only letters, numbers, and hyphens (-).

HELLO!

IS E IS ERENAM NAM MYPUT MY COM

If you activate file sharing as described in KarenH Chapter 13, your Mac’s computer name HELLO! appears in the Finder’s sidebar and in MacBoo k Air the Network folder. A different name might make it easier for other people to access or find your Mac on your network. Other people can use the network name to connect to your Mac manually, so a shorter name makes this easier. MY NET MYWO NAM RKENAM IS E IS

261

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:55 PM

Page 262

Customize the Dock You can make the Dock take up less room on the screen, or you can make the Dock easier to access and use, by modifying a few Dock preferences.

Customize the Dock

1 Open System Preferences.

2

Note: See the “Display System Preferences” section, earlier in this chapter.

2 Click Dock.

The Dock preferences appear.

3 Click and drag the Size

to make the Dock smaller or larger.

l System Preferences adjusts the size of the Dock. Note: If your Dock is already as wide as the screen, dragging the Size slider to the right (toward the Large value) will not have any effect.

262

3

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:55 PM

Page 263

Customizing Your Mac

12

chapter

4 Click Magnification ( changes to

).

5 Click and drag the Magnification slider ( ) to set the magnification level.

4

5

l When you position the mouse ( ) over a Dock icon, your Mac magnifies the icon.

6 Use the Position on screen options to click where you want the Dock to appear, such as the Left side of the screen ( changes to ). l Your Mac moves the Dock to the new position.

7 In the Minimize using pop-up menu, click and then click the effect you want your Mac to use when you minimize a window: Genie Effect or Scale Effect.

6 7

Are there easier methods I can use to control some of these preferences? Yes, your Mac gives you an easier way to turn Dock magnification on and off and to change the Dock position. Click the Apple Icon ( ) and then click Dock. Click Turn Magnification On to enable the magnification feature; click Turn Magnification Off to disable this feature. You can also click the Position on Left command, the Position on Bottom command, or the Position on Right command to change the Dock position. You can also click Dock Preferences to open System Preferences’ Dock window.

263

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:55 PM

Page 264

Add an Icon to the Dock You can enhance the convenience of the Dock by adding an icon for an application you use frequently. The icon remains in the Dock even when the application is closed, so you can always open the application with a single click.

@

Add an Icon to the Dock

1

1 Click the Finder icon ( ) in the Dock.

2 Click Applications. 3 Double-click the icon of the application you want to work with.

3 2

264

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:55 PM

Page 265

12

chapter

Customizing Your Mac l The application’s icon appears in the Dock.

5

4 +click or right-click the icon. 5 Click Keep in Dock. 6 +click or right-click the icon. 7 Click Quit.

7 4

Your Mac closes the application. Note: Another way to add an icon to the Dock is to follow Steps 1 and 2, click and drag the application icon, and then drop it inside the Dock.

l The application’s icon remains in the Dock.

Is there a way to get my Mac to start the application automatically each time I log in to the computer?

Login Items Lotus Notes Illustrator iView Photoshop

Yes, your Mac maintains a list of login items, which are applications that run automatically after you log in. You can configure your application as a login item, and your Mac will open it automatically each time you start the machine. +click or right-click the application’s Dock icon and then click Open at Login.

How do I remove an icon from the Dock?

!

poof

If the application is currently running, click to close the application. Now +click or right-click the application’s Dock icon and then click Remove from Dock. You can remove any Dock icon except Finder ( ) and Trash ( ). Note that removing an application’s Dock icon does not delete the application itself.

265

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:55 PM

Page 266

Hide the Dock If you would like more room on your Mac’s screen to display your applications, you can hide the Dock to free up some screen space.

When the Dock is hidden, it is still easily accessible whenever you need to use it. Hide the Dock TURN ON DOCK HIDING

1 Click . 2 Click Dock. 3 Click Turn Hiding On.

l Your Mac removes the Dock from the desktop.

266

1 2

3

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:55 PM

Page 267

Customizing Your Mac

12

chapter

DISPLAY THE DOCK TEMPORARILY

1 Move the mouse to the bottom of the screen.

1

l Your Mac temporarily displays the Dock. Note: To hide the Dock again, move the mouse ( ) away from the bottom of the screen.

How do I stop hiding the Dock?

Is there a faster way to hide the Dock?

When you no longer need the extra screen space for your applications, you can turn off Dock hiding to bring the Dock back into view. Click , click Dock, and then click Turn Hiding Off.

Yes. You can quickly hide the Dock SHORT by pressing Option + + . This CUT keyboard shortcut is a toggle, which means that you can also turn off opt + Dock hiding by pressing . When the Dock is hidden, you can + display it temporarily by pressing + notebook keyboard, you must press n++).

D

(on a

267

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:56 PM

Page 268

Add a Widget to the Dashboard

1 4 7

You can make the Dashboard better by customizing it to include any widgets that you find useful or informative.

2 5 8 0

*

3 6 9 #

A widget is a mini-application, particularly one designed to perform a single task, such as displaying the weather, showing stock data, or providing sports scores. Add a Widget to the Dashboard

1 Click . 2 Click Applications. 3 Double-click Dashboard.

3

2

1 Your Mac displays the Dashboard and its current set of widgets.

4 Click Dashboard Plus ( ).

4

268

15_384688-ch12.qxp

9/5/08

7:56 PM

Page 269

Customizing Your Mac Your Mac displays its collection of widgets.

5 Use the arrows (

and ) to scroll to the widget you want to add.

6

5

12

chapter

5

6 Click the widget. l Your Mac adds the widget to the Dashboard.

7 Use the mouse to click and drag the widget to the position you prefer.

8

l If the widget is configurable, it displays an i when you position the mouse over the widget.

8 Click the i. 9 Configure the widget as needed. 0 Click Done. ! Click the desktop. 0

Your Mac closes the Dashboard.

!

Are there faster methods I can use to open the Dashboard?

How do I remove a widget from the Dashboard?

The fastest way to start the Dashboard is to click the Dashboard icon ( ) in the DASHBOARD Dock. If your hands are on the keyboard, you can also display the Dashboard quickly by pressing . If + you have a notebook Mac, press , instead. Note, too, that you can also press + (or ) to close the Dashboard.

Dashboard gives you a couple of ways to remove widgets. If you just want to remove a single widget, press and hold , position the mouse over the widget, and then click the Close button ( ) that Dashboard displays in the upper-left corner of the widget. If you want to remove more than one widget, click to display the available widgets, and then click in each widget that you want to remove.

269

16_384688-ch13.qxp

9/5/08

7:58 PM

Page 270

chapter

13

Networking with Your Mac If you have multiple computers in your home or office, you can set up these computers as a network to share information and equipment. Assuming you already have your computers connected, this chapter shows you how to work with the other computers on your network, and how to share your Mac’s resources with other network users.

16_384688-ch13.qxp

9/5/08

7:58 PM

Page 271

Understanding Networking ............................272 Connect to a Wireless Network ....................274 Connect to a Network Resource ..................276 Turn On File and Printer Sharing ..................278 Share a Folder ..................................................280 Share a Printer ..................................................282 Add a Shared Printer ......................................284

16_384688-ch13.qxp

9/5/08

7:58 PM

Page 272

Understanding Networking

A network is a collection of computers that are connected using either a cable hookup or a wireless hookup. A network gives you a number of advantages, such as being able to share files and equipment.

Share Files Networked computers are connected to each other, and so they can exchange files with each other along the connection. This enables people to share information and to collaborate on projects. Networks also include built-in security, so that you can control what files you share with other people.

L’S PAU RT O REP

272

MEMO FROM KAREN

Share Equipment Computers connected over a network can share some types of equipment. For example, one computer can share its printer, which enables other network users to send their documents to that printer. Networked computers can also share hard drives, CD or DVD drives, and document scanners.

16_384688-ch13.qxp

9/5/08

7:58 PM

Page 273

Networking with Your Mac

13

chapter

Wired Networking Network Cable A network cable is a special cable designed for exchanging information. One end of the cable plugs into the network port in the back of a computer on the network, and the other end plugs into the network’s router, discussed next. Information, shared files, and other network data travel through the network cables.

Router A router is a central connection point for all of the computers on the wired portion of the network. For each computer, you run a network cable from the computer’s network port to a port in the back of the router. When network data travels from computer A to computer B, it first goes out through computer A’s network port, along its network cable, and into the router. Then the router passes the data along computer B’s network cable and into its network port.

Wireless Networking Wireless Connections A wireless network is a collection of two or more computers that communicate with each other using radio signals instead of cable. The most common wireless technology is Wireless Fidelity, which is also called Wi-Fi (rhymes with hi-fi) or 802.11. There are four main types — 802.11, 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g — each of which has its own range and speed limits. (A fifth type — 802.11n — may be available in 2009.)

Wireless Access Point A wireless access point (AP) is a device that receives and transmits signals from wireless computers to form a wireless network. Many APs also accept wired connections, which enables both wired and wireless computers to form a network. If your network has a broadband modem, you can connect the modem to a type of AP called a wireless gateway, which extends Internet access to all of the computers on the network.

Budget

273

16_384688-ch13.qxp

9/5/08

7:58 PM

Page 274

Connect to a Wireless Network If your Mac has built-in wireless networking capabilities, you can use them to connect to a wireless network that is within range. This could be a network in your home, your office, or a public location such as a coffee shop. Most wireless networks have security turned on, which means you must know the correct password to connect to the network. Connect to a Wireless Network

1 Click the AirPort status icon (

) in the menu bar.

Note: AirPort is the name that Apple uses for its line of wireless networking devices.

1

Your Mac locates the wireless networks that are within range of your Mac. l The available networks appear in the menu. l Networks with a Lock icon ( ) require a password to join.

2 Click the wireless network you want to join.

274

2

16_384688-ch13.qxp

9/5/08

7:59 PM

Page 275

Networking with Your Mac

13

chapter

If the wireless network is secure, your Mac prompts you for the password.

3 Use the Password text box to type the network password. l If the password is very long, you can click Show password ( changes to ) to see the actual characters instead of dots. This helps to ensure you type the password correctly.

3 4

4 Click OK. Your Mac connects to the wireless network. l The AirPort status icon changes from to to indicate the connection.

I know a particular network is within range, but I do not see it in the list. Why not?

Available Networks 1. Ho me 2. Airp 27 or 3. Caf t e34

Some wireless networks do not broadcast their availability as a security precaution. However, you can still connect to such networks, assuming you know the password if one is required. Click and then click Join Other Network. Use the Network Name text box to type the name of the network, and use the Security list to click and then click the network’s security type. Follow Steps 3 and 4 to join the network.

Can I make a wireless connection to another Mac without using an access point?

Ipsum ad

adipiscing consectetuer

Ipsum ad consectetuer adipiscing

Yes, you can create what is known as an ad hoc wireless and then click network. Click Create Network. Edit the Name text box, if desired, and then click Require Password ( changes to ). In the Security list, click and then click 128-bit WEP. Use the Password text box to type a 13-character password, and then type it again in the Verify text box. Click OK. Your other Mac can now connect to this network. Lorem ipsum consectetu dolor sit adipiscing er ad conse amet, ctetuer elit, aliquip ex ea. sed nit nisl ut

275

16_384688-ch13.qxp

9/5/08

7:59 PM

Page 276

Connect to a Network Resource

You may share the labours of the great, but you may not share the spoil!

To see what other network users have shared on the network, you can use the Network folder to view the other computers and then connect to them to see their shared resources. To get full access to a Mac’s shared resources, you must connect with a user name and password for an administrator account on that Mac. Note, too, that your Mac can also connect to Windows computers. Connect to a Network Resource

2

1 Click Finder ( ). 2 Click Go. 3 Click Network. Note: Another way to run the Network command is to press + + .

3

1

The Network folder appears. l Each icon represents a computer on your local network.

4 Double-click the computer you want to connect to.

276

4

That’s from “The Lion’s Share” by Aesop!

16_384688-ch13.qxp

9/5/08

7:59 PM

Page 277

Networking with Your Mac

13

chapter

Your Mac connects to the network computer using the Guest account.

5

Note: The Guest account has only limited access to the network computer and only limited privileges to work with shared resources on that computer.

5 Click Connect As. Your Mac prompts you to connect to the network computer as a registered user.

6 Use the Name text box to type the username of an account on the network computer.

6 7

7 Use the Password text box to type the password of the account.

8

8 To store the account data, click

9

Remember this password in my keychain ( changes to ).

9 Click Connect. 0

Your Mac connects to the computer and shows the shared resources that you can access.

0 When you are done, click Disconnect.

Is there a faster way to connect to a network computer? Yes. If your Mac detects network computers that are sharing resources, it usually displays the names of those computers in Finder’s sidebar area, under the Shared section. Click the computer you want to connect with and then follow Steps 5 through 9 to connect as a registered user.

l Click the computer you want to connect with.

How can I connect to a computer that does not appear in the Network folder?

Connect To Server

?

If you are sure that the computer is sharing resources on the network, -click or right-click , and then click Connect to Server. In the Connect to Server dialog box, use the Server Address text box to type the address: for a Mac, type the Mac’s network name followed by .local; for a Windows PC, type smb:// followed by the PC’s name; for any computer, type its IP address. Click Connect.

277

16_384688-ch13.qxp

9/5/08

7:59 PM

Page 278

Turn On File and Printer Sharing You can share your files and printers with other network users. This enables those users to access your files and print on your printers over the network. Before you can share these resources, you must turn on your Mac’s file- and printer-sharing features.

File and Printer Sharing ON

OFF

To learn how to share a particular folder, see “Share a Folder” later in this chapter; to learn how to share a particular printer, see “Share a Printer” later in this chapter. Turn On File and Printer Sharing

1 Click the Apple icon ( ). 2 Click System Preferences. Note: You can also click

1

in the Dock.

2

The System Preferences window appears.

3 Click Sharing.

3

278

16_384688-ch13.qxp

9/5/08

7:59 PM

Page 279

Networking with Your Mac

13

chapter

The Sharing window appears.

4 Click the File Sharing check box (

changes to

).

Note: If your Mac is set up to go into sleep mode after an idle period, a message appears to remind you of this. Click OK.

4

You can now share your folders, as described in the next section.

5 Click the Printer Sharing check box (

changes to

).

You can now share your printers, as described later in this chapter.

5

Another user has asked me for my Mac’s IP address. How do I look that up?

Mac

.61 2.168.0

Your Mac gives you a couple of ways 19 to do this. Follow Steps 1 to 3 in this section, click File Sharing (click the name, not the check box); the series of digits after afp:// is your IP address (such as 192.168.0.61). Alternatively, follow Steps 1 and 2, click Network, click Ethernet (or click AirPort if you have a wireless network connection), and then read the IP Address value.

What is the Public folder and how do I access it? Your user account’s Public folder is a Publ special folder that your Mac creates Foldic er automatically and that you use to share files with other people on the network. If someone connects to your Mac using your username and password, he or she has full access to the Public folder. Everyone else can only read the contents of the folder. To access the folder, click , click your user name, and then open the Public folder.

279

16_384688-ch13.qxp

9/5/08

7:59 PM

Page 280

Share a Folder You can share one of your folders on the network, enabling other network users to view and optionally edit the files you place in that folder. Your Mac automatically shares your Public folder, but you can share other folders. Sharing a folder enables you to work on a file with other people without having to send them a copy of the file.

Share a Folder

1 Click . 2 Click System Preferences. Note: You can also click

1

in the Dock.

2

The System Preferences window appears.

3 Click Sharing.

3

280

16_384688-ch13.qxp

9/5/08

7:59 PM

Page 281

Networking with Your Mac

13

chapter

4 Click File Sharing. Note: Be sure to click the File Sharing text, not the check box. This ensures that you do not accidentally uncheck the check box.

5 Under Shared Folders, click

4

.

5

6 Click the folder you want to share. 7 Click Add. 6

Your Mac begins sharing the folder. l The folder appears in the Shared Folders list.

7 8 Click the folder. 9 For the Everyone user, click the current permission and then

9 8

click the permission you want to assign. l The current permission is indicated with a check mark (

).

What are the differences between the various types of permissions I can assign to users? Permissions define what users can and cannot do with the shared folder:

Can I share folders with Windows users? Read/ Write Read Write

Daa v i d K a r e n P a u l

No Access

l Read & Write: Users can open files, add new files, rename or delete existing files, and edit file contents.

l Read Only: Users can open files, but cannot add, delete, rename, or edit files.

l Write Only (Drop Box): Users can add files to the folder, but cannot open the folder.

l No Access: Users cannot open (or even see) the folder.

BE NICE &

share

Yes. In the Sharing window, click Options and then click the Share files and folders using SMB check box ( changes to ). Click your user account ( changes to ), use the Password text box to type your account password, click OK, and then click Done. If you’re a Windows user, you must enter your username and password to see your shared folders.

281

16_384688-ch13.qxp

9/5/08

7:59 PM

Page 282

Share a Printer Toner Saver

ML-1210

Error

Paper

Cancel/Reprint

Demo

Data

If you have a printer connected to your Mac, you can share the printer with the network, enabling other network users to send their documents to your printer. Sharing a printer saves money and time because you only have to purchase and configure one printer for all the computers on your network. Share a Printer

1 Click . 2 Click System Preferences. Note: You can also click

1

in the Dock.

2

The System Preferences window appears.

3 Click Sharing.

3

282

16_384688-ch13.qxp

9/5/08

7:59 PM

Page 283

Networking with Your Mac

13

chapter

4 Click Printer Sharing. Note: Be sure to click the Printer Sharing text, not the check box. This ensures that you do not accidentally uncheck the check box.

4

5 Click the check box beside the printer you want to share ( changes to ).

5

Is there another method I can use to share a printer? Yes, you can follow these steps:

1 2 3 4 5

Click

.

4

Click System Preferences. Click Print & Fax.

5

Click the printer you want to share. Click the Share this printer check box ( changes to ).

283

16_384688-ch13.qxp

9/5/08

7:59 PM

Page 284

Add a Shared Printer You can send a document from your Mac to a shared printer attached to a network computer. This enables you to use just a single printer for all the computers in your network. Before you can do this, you must add a shared printer to your Mac.

k Networ ter u p m o C

Networ k Compu ter

Add a Shared Printer

1 Click . 2 Click System Preferences. Note: You can also click

1

in the Dock.

2

The System Preferences window appears.

3 Click Printer & Fax.

3

284

16_384688-ch13.qxp

9/5/08

7:59 PM

Page 285

Networking with Your Mac

4 Click

13

chapter

.

4 5 Click Default. 6 Click the shared printer. l Look for the word Shared in the printer description.

5 6

7 Click Add. Your Mac adds the printer.

7

Can I add a shared Windows printer? Yes, if you have Windows computers on Mac your network you can connect to any ws Windo printers that they share. Follow Steps 1 to 4 and then click the Windows tab. Click the Windows workgroup, click the computer with the shared printer, log on to the Windows computer, and then click the shared printer you want to use. In the Print Using list, click , click Select a driver to use, and then click the printer in the list that appears. Click Add.

How do I print to the shared network printer that I added? In any application that supports printing, click File and then click Print. You can + . In the Print also press dialog box, use the Printer list to click and then click the shared printer you added in this section. Choose any other printing options you require, and then click Print.

285

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:44 PM

Page 286

chapter

14

Maintaining Your Mac Recycle Bin

Feedback

To keep your Mac running smoothly, maintain top performance, and reduce the risk of computer problems, you need to perform some routine maintenance chores. This chapter shows you how to empty the Trash, delete unnecessary files, update applications, back up your files, and more.

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:44 PM

Page 287

Empty the Trash ................................................288 Organize Your Desktop ..................................289 Check Hard Disk Free Space..........................290 Uninstall Unused Applications......................292 Set a Software Update Schedule..................294 Update Software by Hand..............................296 Remove Unneeded Login Items....................298 Configure Time Machine Backups ..............300 Restore Files Using Time Machine ..............302 Recondition Your Mac Notebook Battery ....304

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:44 PM

Page 288

Empty the Trash When you delete a file, your Mac sends it to the Trash folder. You can free up disk space on your Mac by periodically emptying the Trash folder. You should empty the Trash folder at least once a month.

Empty the Trash

1 Click the Finder icon ( ). 2 Click Finder from the menu. 3 Click Empty Trash.

2 3

-click or rightl You can also click the Trash icon ( ) and then click Empty Trash. Note: Another way to select the Empty Trash command is to press + + Del .

1 Your Mac asks you to confirm.

4 Click OK. Your Mac empties the Trash folder ( changes to ).

2

288

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:44 PM

Page 289

Organize Your Desktop

Maintaining Your Mac

14

chapter

If you use your Mac’s desktop to store files and copies of documents, the desktop can become disarrayed, making it hard to find the icon you want. You can make your desktop easier to navigate by organizing the icons.

Organize Your Desktop

1

-click or right-click the desktop.

2 Click Arrange By. 3 Click Name. l If you just want to nudge each icon into the nearest row and column, click Clean Up, instead.

1 2

3

l Your Mac organizes the icons alphabetically and arranges them in rows and columns from right to left.

289

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:44 PM

Page 290

Check Hard Disk Free Space

Fr

If you run out of room on your Mac’s hard disk, you will not be able to install more applications or create more documents. To ensure this does not happen, you can check how much free space your hard disk has left.

ee

Spac

e

Check Hard Disk Free Space CHECK FREE SPACE USING FINDER

1 Click . 2 Click Macintosh HD. 3 Read the “available” value, which

2

tells you the amount of free space left on the hard disk.

3 1 2

DISPLAY FREE SPACE ON THE DESKTOP

1 Click the desktop. 2 Click View. 3 Click Show View Options.

1

Note: You can also run the Show View Options command by pressing + .

3

290

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:44 PM

Page 291

Maintaining Your Mac The Desktop dialog box appears.

14

chapter

5

4 Click Show item info (

changes to

).

5 Click Close ( ).

4

l Your Mac displays the amount of free hard disk space under the Macintosh HD icon.

How often should I check my Mac’s hard disk free space? With normal computer use, you should check your Mac’s hard disk free space about once a month. If you install programs, create large files, or download media frequently, you should probably check your free space every couple of weeks.

What should I do if my Mac’s hard disk space is getting low? First, you should empty the Trash folder, as described earlier in this chapter. Next, you should uninstall any applications HARD DISK that you no longer use, as described in SPACE the next section. If you have any documents that you are sure you no longer need — particularly large media files — you should send them to the Trash and then empty the Trash folder.

291

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:44 PM

Page 292

Uninstall Unused Applications If you have an application that you no longer use, you can free up some disk space and reduce clutter in the Applications folder by uninstalling that application.

Uninstall Unused Applications

1 Click

.

1

2 Click Applications.

2

292

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:44 PM

Page 293

Maintaining Your Mac

14

chapter

3 Click the application or its folder.

3

4 Click and drag the application or its folder and drop it on the Trash icon ( ). Your Mac uninstalls the application.

4

Is there another way to uninstall an application? Yes, in some cases. A few Mac applications come with a separate program for uninstalling the application:

1 2

Follow Steps 1 to 3.

3

Double-click that icon and then follow the instructions on-screen.

If the application has its own folder, examine the contents for an icon with “Uninstaller” in the name.

Can I restore an application that I uninstalled accidentally? If you used the application’s uninstall program, the only way to restore the application is to reinstall it. If you sent the application to the Trash, and that was the most recent operation you performed, click , click Edit, and then click Undo Move of “Application” (where Application is the name of the application you want to restore). Otherwise, click , and then use the Trash folder to click and drag the application and drop it on Applications.

3

293

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:44 PM

Page 294

Set a Software Update Schedule Apple makes Mac OS X updates available from time to time. These updates fix problems, add new features, and resolve security issues. You can reduce computer problems and maximize online safety by setting up your Mac to download and install these updates automatically. By default, your Mac checks for updates every day. You can configure Software Update to check for updates only once a week or once a month. Set a Software Update Schedule

1 Click . 2 Click System Preferences. Note: You can also click

1

M

y rida y F a : d s ate ur upd y Th a th d s smi ne ord 5 p.m. Wed W y 1 : a update: @3 uesd ay T 3 o Pr w ond ra D

6 7 4 1 3 1 3 2 11 0 1 2 10 @ 2:00 p.m

: update

hiz PhotoW @ .m. 12:00 a

in the Dock.

2

The System Preferences window appears.

3 Click Software Update.

3

294

.

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:44 PM

Page 295

14

chapter

Maintaining Your Mac The Software Update preferences appear.

4 Click Scheduled Check. 5 Click Check for updates (

changes to

4

).

6 In the Check for updates pop-up menu, click and then click the schedule you want: Daily, Weekly, or Monthly.

6

5

7 Click Download important updates automatically ( changes to ). Your Mac checks for updates on your selected schedule, and downloads important updates automatically.

7

Do I have to let my Software Update do the checking automatically?

How does Software Update work? T DA E

UP

D Technically, no, you do not have to rely on Software Update’s automatic checking. Instead, you can check for software updates by hand, as described in “Update Software by Hand”. However, this is not a good idea because you should always keep your Mac software up to date, and this might not happen if you try to remember to check for updates yourself.

re wa Soft le New ilab a Av

When the time comes for an update check, Software Update first examines what d nloa Dow & applications and system software you have te Upda installed on your Mac. Then, for each program, Software Update queries an Internet database on Apple’s site to see if the program has an update available. If it does, Software Update adds the program to the update list. If the update is considered important, Software Update immediately downloads the update. The Software Update icon then bounces in the Dock to let you know that updates are available.

√

295

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:44 PM

Page 296

Update Software by Hand Your Mac checks for new software updates automatically on a regular schedule. If you turned off this feature or configured it to be less frequent, you can still keep your Mac up to date by checking for updates yourself. See “Set a Software Update Schedule” to learn how to configure the Software Update schedule. Update Software by Hand

1 Connect to the Internet, if you

2

have not already done so.

3

2 Click . 3 Click Software Update. Your Mac connects with Apple’s servers and checks for new updates.

Your Mac displays the list of available updates. l A description of the selected update appears here. l If you install any updates that display the Restart icon ( ), you must restart your Mac to complete the installation.

4 Click the check box for any update you do not want to install ( changes to ).

5 Click Install X Items (where X is the number of updates you have selected).

296

4

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:44 PM

Page 297

Maintaining Your Mac

14

chapter

Your Mac asks for the adminstrator password.

6 Use the Password text box to type your password.

7 Click OK.

6 7

For some updates, your Mac displays a software license agreement.

8 Click Agree.

8 For some updates, your Mac prompts you to restart the computer.

9 If you have any unsaved work, save and close those documents.

0

0 Click Restart.

Should I always install every available update?

Is the Mac OS X Update important?

As a general rule, yes, you should install every available update. However, some exceptions exist. For example, if an update is available for an application that you never use, you can safely skip that update. Also, if your Internet connection is slow, you may prefer to install the updates one at a time.

Yes, any update named Mac OS X Update is very important. These are major upgrades to your Mac’s operating system, and they generally improve system stability and security. Because such an update affects your entire Mac and is usually quite large — often several hundred megabytes — it is best to install this update on its own.

297

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:44 PM

Page 298

Remove Unneeded Login Items m Ite n i Log #1

If your Mac has login items that you no longer need, those items may slow down your Mac’s startup and consume extra system memory. From time to time you should check your user account’s login items and remove those you no longer need.

MAC DELETION WASTE REMOVAL CORP.

Remove only a login item that you are sure you do not need or that is causing a problem. Remove Unneeded Login Items

1 Click . 2 Click System Preferences. Note: You can also click

in the Dock.

1

2

The System Preferences window appears.

3 Click Accounts.

3

298

Log in #2 Item

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:45 PM

Page 299

Maintaining Your Mac

14

chapter

4 Click the Lock icon ( ). 5 Use the Password text box to type your password.

6 Click OK.

5

changes to

.

6

4 7 Click Login Items. 8 Click the item you want to

7

remove.

9 Click

.

Your Mac removes the login item.

0 Click

(

changes to

).

8 9 0

What is a login item?

Login To Do List

When you start your Mac, many iTunes Helper behind-the-scenes tasks get Mouse Helper Keyboard Helper performed to set up the computer for your use. One of these tasks is that your Mac checks the list of items that are supposed to start automatically when you log in to your user account. These items are usually applications, but they can also be files, folders, and shared network locations. These are called login items.

Can you give me an example of a problem related to a login item? Sure. If you uninstall an application by moving it to the Trash as described earlier, the application may leave behind one or more login items, and these will cause an error each time you log in. Similarly, if a login item refers to a folder that no longer exists, you will see an error similar to the one shown here.

299

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:45 PM

Page 300

Configure Time Machine Backups Macs are reliable machines, but they do crash and all hard disks eventually die, so at some point your data will be at risk. To avoid losing that data forever, you need to configure your Mac’s Time Machine feature to perform regular backups.

12:01 FRI

3:15 MON

To use Time Machine, your Mac requires a second hard disk. This can be a second internal disk, but on most Macs the easiest course is to connect an external hard disk, which is what this task assumes. Configure Time Machine Backups

1 Connect an external USB or FireWire hard disk to your Mac. l When your Mac recognizes the external hard disk, it adds an icon for the disk to the desktop.

Your Mac asks if you want to use the hard disk as your backup disk.

2 Click Use as Backup Disk. 2

300

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:45 PM

Page 301

Maintaining Your Mac

14

chapter

The Time Machine preferences appear. l This area shows you information about your backups.

3 Click Close ( ).

3

Note: To make changes to your backup configuration or to examine backup information, click in the Dock and then click Time Machine.

How do Time Machine backups work? Time Machine makes backing up your Mac easy because it is all handled automatically on the following schedule:

l The initial backup occurs one hour after you configure Time Machine for the first time. This backup includes your entire Mac.

l Time Machine runs another backup every hour. These hourly backups include just those files and folders that you have changed or created since the most recent hourly backup.

l Time Machine runs a daily backup that includes only those files and folders that you have changed or created since the most recent daily backup.

l Time Machine runs a weekly backup that includes only those files and folders that you have changed or created since the most recent weekly backup.

301

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:45 PM

Page 302

Restore Files Using Time Machine Because Time Machine makes hourly, daily, and weekly backups, it stores older copies and older versions of your data. You can use these backups to restore any file that you accidentally delete, overwrite, or improperly edit.

Restore Files Using Time Machine

1 Click . 2 Click the folder you want to restore, or the folder that contains the file you want to restore.

2

l If you want to restore your entire hard disk, choose Macintosh HD in the sidebar. Note: Restore your entire hard disk only if your original hard disk crashed and you have had it repaired or replaced.

3 1

3 Click Time Machine ( ). The Time Machine interface appears. l Each window represents a backed-up version of the folder. l This area tells you when the displayed version of the folder was backed up. l You can use this timeline to navigate the backed-up versions.

4 Navigate to the date that contains the backup version of the folder or file.

302

4

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:45 PM

Page 303

Maintaining Your Mac

14

chapter

5 If you are restoring a file, click the file.

6 Click Restore.

5

6 If another version of the folder or file already exists, Time Machine asks if you want to keep it or replace it.

7 Click Replace.

7

Time Machine restores the folder or file.

How do I navigate the backups in the Time Machine interface? Here are the most useful techniques:

l Click the top arrow to jump to the earliest version; click the bottom arrow to return to the most recent version.

JULY 1 6 13

l Press and hold the

key and click the arrows to navigate through the backups one version at a time.

JUNE 6

5

2

3

4

1

11

8

10

12

9 16

17

18

15

24

25

22

23

29

30

7 14

20

21

27 7

28

13

14

19

20

21

26

27

28

8 15 22 29

2

3

9 16 23 30

10

4 11

5 12

17

18

19

24

25

26

AUGUST

31

4

5

11

12

1

2

3

6

7

8

9

10

13

14

15

16

17

22

23

24

29

30

31

18

19

20

21

25

26

27

28

l Use the timeline to click a specific version. l Click the version windows.

303

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:45 PM

Page 304

Recondition Your Mac Notebook Battery Finder File Edit View Go Window Help Mon 12:00 PM

To get the most performance out of your Mac notebook’s battery, you need to recondition the battery by cycling it. Cycling a battery means letting it completely discharge and then fully recharging it again.

Cycling Battery . . .

To maintain optimal performance, you should cycle your Mac notebook battery once a month or so. Recondition Your Mac Notebook Battery DISPLAY THE BATTERY STATUS PERCENTAGE

1 Click the Battery status icon (

1

).

2 Click Show. 3 Click Percentage. Your Mac shows the percentage of available battery power remaining.

2 3

CYCLE THE BATTERY

1 Disconnect your Mac notebook’s power cord. l The Battery Status icon changes from to .

304

17_384688-ch14.qxp

9/5/08

7:45 PM

Page 305

Maintaining Your Mac

14

chapter

2 Operate your Mac notebook normally by running applications, working with documents, and so on.

3 As you work, keep your eye on the

3

Battery Status percentage.

When the Battery Status reaches 5%, your Mac warns you that it is now running on reserve power.

4 Click OK. 5 Reattach the power cord. 4 Your Mac restarts and the Battery Status icon changes from to .

6 Leave your Mac plugged in at

6

least until the Battery Status shows 100%.

I do not see the battery status in my menu bar. How do I display it?

Do Mac notebooks suffer from the memory effect?

Click in the Dock and then click Energy Saver. In the Energy Saver window, click Options and then click Show battery status in the menu bar.

Older portable computers used rechargeable nickel metal hydride (NiMH) or nickel cadmium (NiCad) batteries. The NiMH and NiCad types were phased out because they can suffer from a problem called the memory effect, where the battery loses capacity if you repeatedly recharge it without first fully discharging it. All the latest Mac notebooks have rechargeable lithium-ion (Li-ion) batteries. Li-ion batteries are lighter and last longer than NiMH and NiCad batteries and, most importantly, Li-ion batteries do not suffer from the memory effect.

305

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:35 PM

Page 306

chapter

15

Troubleshooting Your Mac Your Mac is a solid machine, and it should give you many years of dependable performance. However, all computers eventually run into problems, and your Mac will likely not be an exception. To help you get through these inevitable rough patches, this chapter offers a few tried-and-true troubleshooting techniques.

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:35 PM

Page 307

Restart Your Mac ..............................................308 Unlock System Preferences............................310 Force a Stuck Program to Close....................312 Repair a Corrupt Preferences File ................314 Reset a Forgotten Password ..........................316 Repair Disk Permissions ................................318 Repair a Disk ....................................................320 Reinstall Mac OS X ..........................................322

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:35 PM

Page 308

Restart Your Mac If a hardware device is having a problem with some system files, it often helps to restart your Mac. By rebooting the computer, you reload the entire system, which is often enough to solve many computer problems. For a problem device that does not have its own power switch, restarting your Mac might not resolve the problem because the device remains powered up the whole time. You can power-cycle such devices as a group by power cycling the Mac. Restart Your Mac RESTART YOUR MAC

1

1 Click the Apple icon ( ). 2 Click Restart.

2

Your Mac asks you to confirm.

3 Click Restart.

3

308

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:35 PM

Page 309

Troubleshooting Your Mac POWER CYCLE YOUR MAC

15

chapter

1

1 Click . 2 Click Shut Down.

2

Your Mac asks you to confirm.

3 Click Shut Down. 4 Wait 30 seconds to give all devices time to spin down.

5 Turn your Mac back on.

3

What other basic troubleshooting techniques can I use?

l Make sure that each device is turned on, that cable connections are secure, and that insertable devices (such as USB devices) are properly inserted.

l If a device is battery powered, replace the batteries. l If a device has an on/off switch, power-cycle the device by turning it off, waiting a few seconds for it to stop spinning, and then turning it back on again.

l Close all running programs.

Troubleshooting

· Check connections · Replace batteries · Power cycle · Close programs · Log out

l Log out of your Mac — click

, click Log Out User, where User is your Mac user name, and then click Log Out — and then log back in again.

309

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:35 PM

Page 310

Unlock System Preferences System Preferences When you open System Preferences and click an icon, you may find that some or all of the controls in the resulting preferences window are disabled. To enable those controls, you need to unlock the preferences.

Security

Dock

s Parental Display Spotlight

Sound

esktop Network D

Remember that having locked system preferences is not a glitch. Instead, it is a security feature designed to prevent unauthorized users from making changes to sensitive system settings. Unlock System Preferences

1 Click the System Preferences icon (

) in the Dock.

The System Preferences window appears.

2 Click the icon of the system preferences you want to work with (such as Parental Controls, as shown here).

2 1

The preferences appear.

3 Click the System Preferences Locked icon (

).

3

310

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:35 PM

Page 311

15

chapter

Troubleshooting Your Mac System Preferences prompts you for your Mac’s administrator password.

4 Use the Password text box to type your Mac’s administrator password.

4

5 Click OK.

5 l

changes to

.

l Your Mac enables the preferences.

Why should I lock system preferences?

Is there a way to lock my entire Mac?

The purpose behind locking system preferences is to prevent unauthorized changes to those preferences. If you are the only person who uses your Mac, then you do not need to worry about this, so you can leave your system preferences unlocked for convenience. However, if other people have access to your Mac, you should probably lock important system preferences by clicking (which changes to ).

Yes, you can configure your Mac to require a password when it wakes up from sleep mode or from the screen saver. Click in the Dock, click Security, click General, and then click Require password to wake this computer from sleep or screen saver.

311

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:35 PM

Page 312

Force a Stuck Program to Close When you are working with an application, you may find that it becomes unresponsive and you cannot quit the program normally. In that case, you can tell your Mac to force the program to quit. When you force a program to quit, you lose any unsaved changes in your open documents. Make sure the program really is stuck before forcing it to quit. See the Tip on the following page for more information. Force a Stuck Program to Close

1 Click

.

1

2 Click Force Quit.

2

312

FORCE QUIT

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:35 PM

Page 313

Troubleshooting Your Mac

15

chapter

The Force Quit Applications window appears.

3 Click the application you want to shut down.

4 Click Force Quit. 3

4

Your Mac asks you to confirm that you want to force the program to quit.

5 Click Force Quit. Your Mac shuts down the program.

5

6 Click Close ( ) to close the Force Quit Applications window.

Are there easier ways to run the Force Quit command? Yes there are. From the keyboard, you can run the Force Quit command SHORT by pressing Option + CUT + Option . If the application has a Dock icon, press and hold and Option and then click the application’s Dock icon. In the menu that appears, click Force Quit.

FORC E QUIT

If an application is not responding, does that always mean the program is stuck?

Application

Not necessarily. For example, Back in some program operations — min3ut such as recalculating a large es spreadsheet or rendering a 3-D image — can take minutes, and during that time the program can appear stuck. Similarly, your Mac may be low on memory, which can also cause a program to seem stuck. In this case, try shutting down some of your other programs to free up some memory.

313

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:35 PM

Page 314

Repair a Corrupt Preferences File One of the most common causes of application flakiness is a preferences file that has somehow become corrupted. You can solve the problem by deleting the preferences file so that the application has to rebuild it. The downside to this method is that you may have to reconfigure the application’s preferences.

Repair a Corrupt Preferences File

1 If the problem application is still running, shut it down.

4

Note: If you have trouble closing the application, see the section “Force a Stuck Program to Close.”

2 Click Finder ( ). 3 Click your user account folder. 4 Double-click the Library icon.

3

2 The Library folder appears.

5 Double-click the Preferences icon.

5

314

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:35 PM

Page 315

Troubleshooting Your Mac

15

chapter

The Preferences folder appears.

6 Click and drag the problem application’s preferences file and drop it on the Trash. Your Mac deletes the preferences file.

6

7 Run the application and set some preferences. l The application creates a new preferences file.

7

What is a preferences file? A preferences file is a

How can I tell which preferences file belongs to the problem application?

document that stores options, iTunesces settings, and other data related e r P feren to a particular application. To specify preferences, click the application’s name in the menu bar and then click Preferences. The application displays a dialog box that you use to specify the preferences. When you are done, the application saves the new settings in the preferences file.

Preferences files use the .plist filename extension. In most cases, the filename uses the following general format: com.iTunes.p list com.company.application.plist. Here, company is the name of the software company that makes the application, and application is the name of the program. Here are some examples: com.apple.iTunes.plist; com.microsoft.Word.plist; com.palm.HotSync.plist.

315

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:35 PM

Page 316

Reset a Forgotten Password Password

If you forget the password associated with your Mac’s main user account, you will be unable to log on to that account and to perform activities such as updating your Mac. You can recover from this problem by resetting the administrative password. To reset your Mac’s administrative password, you need to have the original installation DVD that came with your Mac or that you used to install Mac OS X. Reset a Forgotten Password

1 Insert the Mac OS X Installation DVD. 2 Restart your Mac. 3 Press and hold while your Mac is restarting. Note: You can release logo.

when you see the Apple

4

The Mac OS X screen appears.

4 Click the language you want to use. 5 Click Continue ( ).

5 The Mac OS X Installer appears.

6 Click Utilities. 7 Click Reset Password.

316

6 7

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:35 PM

Page 317

Troubleshooting Your Mac

15

chapter

The Reset Password dialog box appears.

8 Click Macintosh HD. 9 Click the drop-down list ( )

8

and then click your Mac’s main user account.

0 ! @ # $ %

9

Type the new password. Retype the new password.

0

Type a password hint.

!

Click Save. Click OK. Press

+

@ .

#

Reset Password quits and returns you to Mac OS X Installer.

^ Press

+

.

Installer asks you to confirm you want to quit.

& Click Restart.

$

Your Mac restarts with your new password in effect.

&

How do I reset passwords for my Mac’s other accounts? Follow these steps:

1 2 3 4

Log in to your Mac using the main administrative account. Click

in the Dock.

Click Accounts. Click , type your administrative password, and click OK.

5 6 7 8 9 0

Click the user account. Click Reset Password. Type the new password. Retype the new password. Type a password hint.

7 8 9 0

Click Reset Password.

317

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:36 PM

Page 318

Repair Disk Permissions If the permissions on one or more of your Mac’s system files become corrupted, your Mac may freeze, run slowly, or become unstable. You can solve these problems by repairing your Mac’s disk permissions.

Repair Disk Permissions

1 Click . 2 Click Applications. 3 Double-click Utilities. Note: You can also open the Utilities folder by pressing + + .

2 3 1 The Utilities folder opens.

4 Double-click Disk Utility.

4

318

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:36 PM

Page 319

Troubleshooting Your Mac

15

chapter

The Disk Utility window appears.

5 Click your Mac’s hard disk.

5

6 Click First Aid. 7 Click Repair Disk Permissions.

6

Your Mac repairs the disk permissions.

8 When the repair is complete, press

+

to quit Disk Utility.

7

What are disk permissions? All the files on your Mac have permissions

applied to them. Permissions are a PermissioWrnsite Paul - Read and collection of settings that determine what Only Karen - Read users or groups of users can do with each cess David - No Ac file. For example, if a file implements readonly permissions, it means that all users can only read the contents of the file and cannot make any changes to the file or delete it. If the permissions for your Mac’s system files change or get corrupted, it can cause all kinds of problems, including program lock-ups and unstable system behavior.

How do I repair permissions if I cannot start my Mac? Corrupt disk permissions often prevent your Mac from booting. In this case, follow Steps 1 to 6 in the “Reset a Forgotten Password” section, click Disk Utility, and then follow Steps 5 to 7 in this section.

319

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:36 PM

Page 320

Repair a Disk If your Mac will not start, or if an application freezes, an error on the main hard disk is possibly causing the problem. To see if this is the case, you need to repair the hard disk using the Disk Utility program. To repair your Mac’s main hard drive, you need to have the original installation DVD that came with your Mac or that you used to install Mac OS X. Repair a Disk

1 Insert the Mac OS X Installation DVD. 2 Restart your Mac. 3 Press and hold while your Mac is restarting. Note: You can release

when you see the Apple logo.

The Mac OS X screen appears.

4

4 Click the language you want to use. 5 Click .

5 The Mac OS X Installer appears.

6 Click Utilities. 7 Click Disk Utility.

320

6 7

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:36 PM

Page 321

Troubleshooting Your Mac

15

chapter

The Disk Utility window appears.

8 Click your Mac’s hard disk. 9 Click First Aid. 0 Click Repair Disk.

9

8

0

Disk Utility verifies the hard disk and attempts to repair any errors it finds. l Information on the disk checks appears here. l The result of the checks appears here.

! Press

+

.

Disk Utility quits and returns you to Mac OS X Installer.

@ Press

+

.

Installer asks you to confirm.

# Click Restart.

#

How do I repair errors on a secondary hard disk?

What do I do if Disk Utility finds a problem?

If you are working with your Mac’s main hard disk, you must boot to the Mac OS X FIRST Install DVD to repair that AID disk. For all other hard disks, however, you can perform the repair without rebooting. Click , click Applications, click Utilities, and then double-click Disk Utility. Click the disk you want to repair, click First Aid, and then click Repair Disk.

In the best-case scenario, Disk Utility reports either “No repairs were necessary” or DISKIR “The volume Macintosh HD PA RE appears to be OK.” Otherwise, Disk Utility attempts to fix any errors it finds. If Disk Utility cannot fix the errors, you must turn to a third-party disk repair application. Two useful tools are DiskWarrior (www.alsoft.com) and TechTool Pro (www.micromat.com).

321

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:36 PM

Page 322

Reinstall Mac OS X If worse comes to worst and your Mac will not start or if your system is completely unstable, then you need to reinstall the operating system. To reinstall Mac OS X, you need to have the original installation DVD that came with your Mac or that you used to install Mac OS X.

Reinstall Mac OS X

1 Insert the Mac OS X Installation DVD. 2 Restart your Mac. 3 Press and hold while your Mac is restarting. Note: You can release

when you see the Apple logo.

The Mac OS X screen appears.

4

4 Click the language you want to use. 5 Click .

5 The Mac OS X Installer appears.

6 Click Continue.

6

322

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:36 PM

Page 323

Troubleshooting Your Mac

15

chapter

The Software License Agreement dialog box appears.

7 Click Continue. Note: In some versions of the Installer, you click Agree instead, and then skip Step 8.

7 The Installer asks if you agree to the license terms.

8 Click Agree. 8

Under what circumstances should I reinstall Mac OS X?

Do I need to back up my data before reinstalling?

The most common scenario is when your Mac does not start, and repairing the hard disk as described in the previous section has no effect. Another common scenario is when your Mac suffers from frequent lock-ups, application crashes, and other unstable behavior, and repairing preferences files and disk permissions, as described earlier in this chapter, have no effect.

No, this is not usually necessary. The Mac OS X Installer comes with an Archive and Install option that enables you to preserve your Mac’s existing user accounts as well as each account’s folders. This enables you to use your existing accounts and data with the reinstalled version of OS X. However, this option may be disabled if your Mac does not have enough free hard disk space.

DA T

A

➥

continued

323

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:36 PM

Page 324

Reinstall Mac OS X (continued) The fastest way to reinstall Mac OS X is to perform the installation using the Archive and Install option. This not only preserves your user accounts and data, but it also bypasses the Setup Assistant, which greatly reduces the number of steps.

Reinstall Mac OS X (continued)

The Select a Destination dialog box appears.

9 Click your Mac’s main hard disk. 0 Click Options.

9

0 The installation options appear.

! Click Archive and Install ( changes to ).

@ Click Preserve Users and Network Settings ( to ).

# Click OK.

!

changes

@

#

324

18_384688-ch15.qxp

9/5/08

9:36 PM

Page 325

Troubleshooting Your Mac

15

chapter

$ Click Continue.

$ % Click Install. Installer reinstalls Mac OS X on your Mac.

%

Why does my Apple Bluetooth mouse not work with the Installer program? The Mac OS X Installer application does not come with the necessary device drivers to work with the signals that the Apple Bluetooth mouse or any other wireless mouse generates. You cannot reinstall Mac OS X unless your Mac has a mouse that is physically connected to the computer.

Once Mac OS X is reinstalled, what else do I need to do? The first thing you should do is Reinstall update your Mac’s software. To To Do List do this, click and then click Software Update. Next, you should reinstall any third-party applications that you used on your old Mac OS X installation. Once you have your applications installed, you should check your preferences in each program to make sure they are configured correctly. Update software

Reinstall programs

Check preferences

325

19_384688-bindex.qxp

9/5/08

7:46 PM

Page 326

Index A About This Mac window, 5 accepting invitation audio chat, 211 text chat, 209 access point (AP), wireless, 273 accessories, MacBook Air, 15 account. See also MobileMe account Apple, 102 e-mail, 190–191 iChat, 204–205 Account Setup dialog box, 205 ad hoc wireless network, 275 Add Account dialog box, 190 address Mac IP, 279 Web page, 171 Address Book application closing, 215 contacts, 216–221 icon, 61 opening, 214 overview, 32 AIM (AOL Instant Messenger), 206 AirPort status icon, 274 album, photo, 120–121, 242 all-day appointment, 33, 227 Antique effect, 131 AOL Instant Messenger (AIM), 206 AP (access point), wireless, 273 Apple logo, removing, 137 Apple Mac OS X. See Mac OS X appointment all-day, 33, 227 navigating calendars, 224–225 regular, 33, 226 repeating, 33, 228–229 to-do items, 230–231, 241 Archive and Install option, 323 aspect ratio, 259 attachment, file, 194–195 audio. See CD; iTunes application audio chat, 31, 210–211 audio in/out port iMac, 7 Mac Mini, 9 Mac Pro, 11 MacBook, 17 MacBook Air, 15 MacBook Pro, 13

B background, desktop, 252–253 background track, 155 backup, 61, 300–303

326

banking Web site, 176 Basic Membership, 235 battery, 304–305 Better Battery Life item, 257 Better Energy Savings item, 257 Bigger font command, 159 Birthday field, 239 bit rate, 95, 105 blemish, 25 blocking iChat senders, 209 spam, 237 blog, 21, 29 Bluetooth, 50–53, 325 Bold font command, 159 bookmark, 180 bouncing message, 201 browsing Web, 28, 174–175. See also Safari Web browser buddy list, 206–207 burning to CDs, 23, 98–99 to DVDs, 164–165

C cable adapter, 37 Calendar application. See iCal application; MobileMe account camcorder, 48–49 camera, 25, 31, 48–49, 145 camera icon, 210 Categories area, 87 Cc field, 192 CD burning to, 23, 98–99 ejecting, 93 importing tracks from, 23, 94–95 pausing, 91–92 playing, 90 random play order, 93 repeating, 92 resuming, 91–92 skipping tracks, 91 Center option, 253 central processing unit (CPU), 5 chat. See iChat application check box, 69 clip. See video clip Close button, 65 closing Address Book application, 215 iCal application, 223 iChat application, 205 iPhoto application, 115 iTunes application, 85 Mail application, 189 stuck programs, 312–313 System Preferences, 251

19_384688-bindex.qxp

9/5/08

7:46 PM

Page 327

Columns view, 110 communicating. See iChat application; Mail application compact disc. See CD Company field, 216 composing e-mail message offline, 193 composite port, 37 computer name, 260–261 connecting to external displays, 36–37 to fax modems, 42–43 to imaging devices, 48–49 to iPods, 44–45 to iPhones, 46–47 to network resources, 276–277 to other Macs, 54–57 to printers, 38–41 via Bluetooth, 50–53 to wireless networks, 274–275 contact adding, 216–217 adding photos for, 219, 239 creating groups of, 220–221 editing, 218–219 MobileMe Contacts application, 238–239 overview, 32 contact list, 206–207 Contacts application. See contact; MobileMe account Contents area, 87 continuous loop, playing photos in, 139 copying files, 78 text, 76–77 Cover Flow view, 24, 110 CPU (central processing unit), 5 credit, adding to video clips, 156–157 cropping photo, 122–123 crossover cable, 55 customizing Mac adding widgets to Dashboard, 268–269 desktop background, 252–253 display resolution, 258–259 Dock, 262–267 name, 260–261 screen saver, 254–255 sleep options, 256–257 System Preferences, 250–251 cycling battery, 304–305 Macs, 309

D Dashboard adding widgets to, 268–269 icon, 61 default home page, 178

deleting files, 81 single occurrence from recurring series of events, 229 text, 74 desktop background, 252–253 displaying hard disk free space on, 290–291 icons, 60 organizing, 289 overview, 60 Desktop dialog box, 291 desktop Mac iMac, 6–7 Mac mini, 8–9 Mac Pro, 10–11 overview, 4 dialog box control, 68 digital camera, 25, 31, 48, 145 digital rights management (DRM), 103 disconnecting iPhone, 47 iPod, 45 discoverability, Bluetooth, 51 disk. See also CD; DVD free space, 290–291 repairing, 320–321 disk permission, repairing, 318–319 Disk Utility window, 321 DiskWarrior application, 321 displaying battery status percentage, 304 bookmarked pages, 181 hard disk free space on desktop, 290–291 hidden Dock temporarily, 267 iDisk online storage feature, 244 MobileMe Calendar application, 240 MobileMe Contacts application, 238–239 MobileMe Mail application, 236 movie stills, 165 System Preferences, 250–251 display/monitor connecting to external, 36–37 desktop background, 252–253 resolution, 258–259 screen saver, 254–255 Dock adding icons to, 63, 264–265 displaying temporarily, 267 elements of, 61 hiding, 266–267 overview, 60 removing icons from, 265 setting preferences, 262–263 document opening, 71 presentations, 21

327

19_384688-bindex.qxp

9/5/08

7:46 PM

Page 328

Index previewing, 73 printing, 72–73 saving, 70 spreadsheets, 21 text, 20 Web pages, 21 word-processing, 20 Documents folder, 61 downloading files from Web, 184–185 music, 103 Downloads folder, 61 Downloads window, removing items from, 185 DRM (digital rights management), 103 due date, 231 DVD making, 27 playing, 26 saving movies to, 162–165 saving photos to, 136–139 DVI port, 36–37

E eCommerce, 29 editing contacts, 218–219 MobileMe Calendar events, 241 photos, 25 song information, 100–101 text, 74–77 Effects palette, 131 ejecting CDs, 93 iPhone, 47 iPod, 45 e-mail. See Mail application; MobileMe account emptying Trash folder, 288 Energy Saver preferences window, 256–257 Enhance tool, 131 Equalizer window, 91 error, repairing, 321 event iCal, 226–229 MobileMe Calendar, 241 Event Name text box, 116 executing command, 66–67 exporting movie to QuickTime video file, 162 external display, 36–37. See also display/monitor external hard disk, 300

F Family Pack membership, 235 fax modem, connecting to, 42–43 file. See also video file copying, 78 deleting, 81

328

downloading from Web, 184–185 moving, 79 renaming, 80 restoring, 302–303 sharing, 245, 272, 278–279, 281 uploading to iDisk, 244–245 file attachment, 194–195 Fill Screen option, 253 Finder checking hard disk free space with, 290 icon, 61 previewing photos in, 110 FireWire 400 port iMac, 7 Mac Mini, 9 Mac Pro, 11 MacBook, 17 MacBook Pro, 13 FireWire 800 port iMac, 7 Mac Pro, 11 MacBook Pro, 13 First field, 216 Fit to Screen option, 253 folder, sharing, 57, 280–281 font, 159, 193 Fonts dialog box, 193 Force Quit Applications window, 313 forcing stuck program to close, 312–313 forgotten password, 316–317 forwarding e-mail message, 202–203 frame, trimming from clip, 149 free space, 290–291 full-screen mode, 119, 161

G Gallery application, 242–243 GarageBand application, 23, 61 Go to Date command, 225 Go to date dialog box, 225 group, contact, 220–221 Guest account, 277

H hard disk free space, 290–291 hiding Dock, 266–267 History list, 176–177 home page, 178–179 horizontal scroll bar, 65 hot corner, 255

I iCal application appointments, 33, 226–229 closing, 223 icon, 61

19_384688-bindex.qxp

9/5/08

7:46 PM

Page 329

navigating calendars, 224–225 opening, 222 overview, 32–33 to-do items, 230–231, 241 iChat application adding buddies, 206–207 audio chat, 31, 210–211 closing, 205 configuring accounts, 204–205 icon, 61 opening, 204–205 text chat, 31, 208–209 video chat, 31, 211 icon desktop, 60 Dock, 61, 264–265 restoring original in System Preferences, 251 iDisk online storage feature, 244–245 iDVD application icon, 61 importing video files to, 163–164 overview, 27 IM (instant messaging). See iChat application iMac, 6–7 Image Capture application, 25, 49, 116 imaging device, connecting to, 48–49 iMovie application. See also video clip closing, 143 connecting imaging devices, 48 icon, 61 importing video files, 144–145 opening, 142–143 overview, 27 playing movies, 160–161 saving to DVDs, 162–165 importing CD tracks, 23, 94–95 photos, 25, 116–117 video files, 144–145, 163–164 incoming mail server, 191 Index Sheet button, 113 Installer program, 320, 325 installing update, 297 instant messaging (IM). See iChat application Intel CPU, 5 Intel Xeon quad core processor, 10 internal fax modem, 42 Internet. See MobileMe account; Safari Web browser Internet banking site, 176 Internet radio, 22, 104–105 invitation audio chat, 210–211 text chat, 208–209 IP address, 279 iPhone connecting to, 46–47 disconnecting from, 47 uploading photos to album with, 243

iPhoto application. See also photo albums, 120–121 closing, 115 connecting imaging devices, 48 cropping photos, 122–123 effects, 130–131 e-mailing photos, 132–133 icon, 61 importing photos, 116–117 opening, 114 overview, 24–25 red eye removal, 128–129 rotating photos, 124–125 straightening photos, 126–127 viewing photos, 118–119 zooming photos, 111 iPod connecting to, 44–45 disconnecting from, 45 synchronizing with, 23 iSight camera, 25, 31, 145 Italic font command, 159 iTunes application. See also CD closing, 85 editing song information, 100–101 icon, 61 Internet radio, 104–105 navigating window, 87 opening, 84 overview, 22 playing songs, 88 playlists, 96–97 podcasts, 106–107 recording, 23 synchronizing with iPod, 23 volume adjustments, 89 iTunes Library, 86 iTunes Store, 22, 102–103, 107 iWeb application, 61

J Job Title field, 239

K Kbps (kilobits per second), 105 Keep me logged in for two weeks option, 235 Ken Burns effect, 152–153 kilobits per second (Kbps), 105

L Last field, 216 leveling photo, 127 link, 170, 172 list box, 68 Local Hostname text box, 261 Lock icon, 274

329

19_384688-bindex.qxp

9/5/08

7:46 PM

Page 330

Index locking System Preferences, 311 logging in to MobileMe account, 234–235 login item, 265, 298–299 LPT (parallel port), 39

M Mac connecting to another, 54–57 CPUs, 5 desktops, 4–11 portables, 4, 12–17 Mac mini, 8–9 Mac OS X icon, 61 multitasking, 64 reinstalling, 322–325 screen elements, 60 shortcuts, 75 updating, 297 Mac Pro, 10–11 MacBook, 16–17 MacBook Air, 14–15 MacBook Air SuperDrive, 15 MacBook Pro, 12–13 Magnification slider, 263 Mail Activity area, 198 Mail application. See also MobileMe account accounts, 190–191 adding file attachments, 194–195 automatic checking interval, 199 bouncing messages, 201 closing, 189 forwarding messages, 202–203 icon, 61 opening, 188 reading messages, 199 receiving messages, 198 replying to messages, 200–201 sending messages, 192–193 signatures, 196–197 Mail Photo dialog box, 133 maintenance battery, 304–305 emptying Trash folder, 288 hard disk free space, 290–291 organizing desktop, 289 removing unneeded login items, 298–299 Time Machine backups, 300–303 uninstalling unused applications, 292–293 updating software, 294–297 Maximize button, 65 media site, 29 Member name text box, 234 memory effect, 305 menu bar, 60, 259 message. See iChat application; Mail application

330

Micro DVI port, 36 Microsoft PowerPoint application, 21 Mini DVI port, 36 Minimize button, 65 mini-month feature, 224 MobileMe account Calendar application, 240–241 Contacts application, 238–239 Gallery application, 242–243 iDisk online storage feature, 244–245 logging in to, 234–235 Mail feature, 236–237 overview, 29 purchasing from iTunes Store, 102 synchronizing with, 33, 246–247 monitor. See display/monitor mouse Bluetooth, 325 moving and copying text with, 77 pointer, 60 movie. See iMovie application; video clip Multiple Item Information dialog box, 101 multitasking, 64 music. See CD; iTunes application muting volume, 89

N name computer, 260–261 network, 261 Name text box, 40, 43 network cable, 55, 273 network name, 261 network port iMac, 7 Mac Mini, 9 Mac Pro, 11 MacBook, 17 MacBook Pro, 13 networking shared resources, 276–277 sharing equipment, 272 sharing files, 272, 278–279 sharing folders, 280–281 sharing printers, 278–279, 282–285 wired networks, 273 wireless networks, 273–275 New Message window, 237 New To Do command, 230 news, online, 29 nickel cadmium (NiCad) battery, 305 nickel metal hydride (NiMH) battery, 305 Nickname field, 239 No Access permission, 281 nonstandard outgoing mail port, 191 notebook Mac. See portable Mac Now Playing area, 87

19_384688-bindex.qxp

9/5/08

7:46 PM

O online storage. See iDisk online storage feature opening Address Book application, 214 documents, 71 iCal application, 222 iChat application, 204–205 iPhoto application, 114 iTunes application, 84 Mail application, 188 System Preferences, 250 optical audio in/out port, 11 Optimization pop-up menu, 257 OS X. See Mac OS X Outbox folder, 193

P pairing, 51 parallel port (LPT), 39 parallel-to-USB adapter cable, 39 passkey, 52 password, resetting forgotten, 316–317 pausing CD, 91 permission disk, 319 sharing, 281 persistence, 254 personal home page, 21 photo adding for contacts, 219, 239 adding to video clips, 152–153 albums, 120–121, 243 cropping, 122–123 duration of appearance in movies, 153 editing, 25 effects, 130–131 e-mailing, 132–133 in iChat, 207 importing, 25, 116–117 organizing, 24 Photo Booth application, 134–135 previewing, 110–111 red eye removal, 25, 128–129 rotating, 124–125 saving to DVDs, 136–139 sharing, 242–243 slideshows, 112–113 straightening, 126–127 taking, 25 viewing, 24, 118–119 zooming, 111 Photo Booth application, 25, 134–135 pixel, 259 playback control, iTunes, 87 playback window, enlarging, 161

Page 331

playing CDs, 90 DVDs, 26 movies, 27, 160–161 podcasts, 27 random play order, 93 songs, 88 TV shows, 27 video files, 26 playlist, 96–97 .plist filename extension, 315 podcast, 27, 106–107 POP (Post Office Protocol) account, 190–191 pop-up menu, 69 port for external displays, 36–37 iMac, 7 Mac mini, 9 Mac Pro, 11 MacBook, 17 MacBook Air, 15 MacBook Pro, 13 parallel, 39 portable Mac MacBook, 16–17 MacBook Air, 14–15 MacBook Pro, 12–13 overview, 4 Post Office Protocol (POP) account, 190–191 power cycling Mac, 309 PowerPC CPU, 5 PowerPoint application, 21 preferences file, repairing corrupt, 314–315 Prefix field, 239 presentation, 21 Preview application, 24, 111–112 previewing documents, 73 photos, 110–111 video clips before adding, 147 Print & Fax preferences window, 39 Print dialog box, 68, 73 Print Using list, 41 printer connecting to, 38–41 printing documents, 72–73 sharing, 278–279, 282–285 Printer Name list, 40 program window, 65 Public folder, 279 pull-down menu, 66 purchasing from iTunes Store, 102–103

Q QuickTime Player, 26, 61 QuickTime video files, 162

331

19_384688-bindex.qxp

9/5/08

7:46 PM

Page 332

Index R radio, Internet, 22, 104–105 radio button, 69 Read & Write permission, 281 Read Only permission, 281 reading e-mail message, 199 rebooting Mac, 308 receiving e-mail message, 198, 236 recent search, 183 reconditioning notebook battery, 304–305 recording music, 23 voiceovers, 156–157 red eye removal, 25, 128–129 redirecting e-mail message, 201 reinstalling Mac OS X, 322–325 reminder message, 231 removing Apple logo from main menu, 137 Bluetooth devices, 53 icons from Dock, 265 imported music, 95 items from Downloads window, 185 red eye from photos, 25, 128–129 unneeded login items, 298–299 video clips, 147 widget from Dashboard, 269 renaming file, 80 repairing corrupt preferences files, 314–315 disk permissions, 318–319 disks, 320–321 repeating appointment, 33, 228–229 repeating CD, 92 Reply All option, 200 Reply option, 200 replying to e-mail message, 200–201, 237 Reset Password dialog box, 317 Resize button, 65 resolution, display, 258–259 restarting Mac, 308–309 restoring files, 302–303 uninstalled applications, 293 resuming CD, 91 ripping track from CD, 94 rotating photo, 124–125 router, 273 RSS feed, 29

S Safari Web browser bookmarks, 180–181 browsing, 28, 174–175 closing, 169 downloading files, 184–185

332

History list, 176–177 home page, 178–179 icon, 61 links, 170 opening, 168 overview, 28–29 page addresses, 171 searching Web, 28, 182–183 tabs, 172–173 saving documents, 70 movies to DVDs, 162–165 photos to DVDs, 136–139 scanner, connecting to, 48 scheduling. See iCal application screen saver, 254–255 Scrolling Credits thumbnail, 158 search engine, 28 searching, Web, 28, 182–183 secondary hard disk, repairing error on, 321 security locking Mac, 311 wireless network, 272, 274 selecting text, 75–76 sending chat invitations, 208, 210 e-mail messages, 192–193, 237 Sent folder, 201 Sepia effect, 131 serial port, 43 shared resource, connecting to, 276–277 sharing equipment, 272 files, 245, 272, 278–279, 281 folders, 57, 280–281 photos, 242–243 printers, 278–279, 282–285 Sharing preferences window, 260 Sharing window, 279 shopping cart, 103 Show Fonts command, 159 show/hide toolbar button, 65 Shuffle button, 91 signature, 196–197 skipping CD track, 91 sleep option, 256–257 Slide Duration pop-up menu, 139 slideshow, 112–113 Smaller font command, 159 smart album, 121 smart group, 221 smart playlist, 97 socializing online, 29 Software License Agreement dialog box, 323 song. See CD; iTunes application soundtrack, slideshow, 139 spam, 237

19_384688-bindex.qxp

9/5/08

7:46 PM

Page 333

spreadsheet, 21 starting program, 62–63 Status area, 87 status bar, 65 Stereo Bit Rate list, 95 Stickies application, 20 still, displaying, 165 straightening photo, 126–127 Stretch to Fill Screen option, 253 stretched resolution, 259 Subject field, 192 subscribing to podcast, 106–107 Suffix field, 239 S-Video port, 37 switching between programs, 64 synchronizing with iPod, 23 with MobileMe account, 33, 246–247 System Preferences, 61, 250–251, 310–311

T tab, 172–173 TechTool Pro application, 321 telephone icon, 210 text copying, 76 deleting characters, 74 e-mail, 193 inserting above photos, 133 moving, 77 overview, 20 selecting, 75–76 text box, 68 text chat, 31, 208–209 TextEdit application, 20 Tile option, 253 Time Machine backup application, 61, 300–303 time zone, 241 title, adding to video clip, 158–159 title bar, 65 To field, 192 to-do item, 230–231, 241 toolbar, 65, 67 trackpad, 12, 16 transition, 150–151 Transition pop-up menu, 139 Trash folder, 61, 81, 288 Trash window, 81 trimming video clip, 148–149 troubleshooting forcing stuck programs to close, 312–313 power cycling, 309 reinstalling Mac OS X, 322–325 repairing corrupt preferences files, 314–315 repairing disk permissions, 318–319 repairing disks, 320–321 resetting forgotten passwords, 316–317

restarting, 308–309 unlocking System Preferences, 310–311 TV show, playing, 27 TWAIN software, 49

U uninstalling unused application, 292–293 unlocking System Preferences, 310–311 updating software, 294–297 uploading files to iDisk, 244–245 photos, 243 USB Ethernet adapter, 15 USB port iMac, 7 Mac Mini, 9 Mac Pro, 11 MacBook, 17 MacBook Air, 15 MacBook Pro, 13

V vertical scroll bar, 65 VGA port, 37 video, 26–27. See also iMovie application; video clip video camera, 48–49 video chat, 31, 211 video clip adding music tracks, 154–155 adding photos, 152–153 adding titles and credits, 158–159 adding to project, 146–147 adding transitions, 150–151 recording voiceovers, 156–157 selecting multiple, 161 trimming, 148–149 video file exporting movies to, 162 importing, 144–145, 163–164 playing, 26 video out port iMac, 7 Mac Mini, 9 Mac Pro, 11 MacBook, 17 MacBook Air, 15 MacBook Pro, 13 View option, 87 viewing. See also displaying home page, 179 photos, 24, 118–119 visualization, 91 voice level, 157 voiceover, 156–157 Voiceover dialog box, 157 volume adjustment, 89

333

19_384688-bindex.qxp

9/5/08

7:46 PM

Page 334

Index W Web. See MobileMe account; Safari Web browser Web page addresses, 171 overview, 21 shortcuts to navigating, 175 shortcuts to open in tabs, 173 Web-based e-mail account, 30 Week view, 225 Welcome to iChat dialog box, 204 Welcome to Mail dialog box, 188 widescreen display, 12, 259

334

widget, 268–269 Windows, accessing iDisk from, 245 wired network, 273 wireless gateway, 273 wireless network, 273–275 word-processing, 20 Write Only drop box, 281

Z zooming photo, 111